Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 268

Panasonic Telephone Systems

www.voicesonic.com
Phone: 877-289-2829
Panasonic KX-T123210, KX-T123220, KX-T123230, KX-T123250, KX-T123211D, T123210, T123220, T123230, T123250, T123211D

LLATIO MANUAL
I
INSTALLATION
ELECTRONIC MODULAR SWITCHING SYSTEM

ITI 23211 D
EASA-PHONE

Panasonic
Please read this manual before connecting the KX-T123211 D

Thank you for purchasing the Panasonic Model KX-T123211 D,


Electronc Modular Switching System (EMSS).

SYSTEM COMPONENT

Model No.
:
,dice unit
._: ,; ~._
,::.~~-:_-,
.._..1,.
I -:_.
...:
.,,
:-.
,: ,
~
..;,:_-._..:
_.
..;--:...,::A:
.. r .../.- - :..--_:-:
,lephone

KX-Tl23211

Description
D

Electronic

Modular Switching

System

,.(

Optional
equipment

KX-Tl23220

EMSS Proprietary Telephone

KX-T123230

EMSS Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 COs)

KX-Tl23235

EMSS Proprietary Telephone

with LCD (12 COs)

KX-Tl23250

EMSS Proprietary Telephone

(12 COs)

KX-T61620

EMSS Proprietary Telephone

(6 COs)

KX-T61630

EMSS Proprietary Telephone with LCD (6 COs)

KX-T61631

EMSS Proprietary Telephone with LCD (6 COs)

KX-T61650

EMSS Proprietary Telephone

(6 COs)

KX-T30820

EMSS Proprietary Telephone

(3 COs)

(12 COs)

KX-T30825

EMSS Proprietary

KX-T30830

EMSS Proprietary Telephone with LCD (3 COs, 8 DSSs)

KX-T30850

EMSS Proprietary Telephone

KX-T123240
KX-T61640

Telephone

(3 COs)
(3 COs)

DSS Console (32 DSSs, 16 Feature buttons)


DSS Console (16 DSSs 16 Feature buttons)

KX-T123241

DSS Console Card

KX-T123270

Expansion

Card (up to eight extension

lines)

KX-Tl23271

Expansion

Card (up to four extension

KX-Tl23280

Expansion

Card (up to four CO lines)

lines)

KX-Tl23281

Expansion

Card (up to two CO lines)

KX-T123285

Off Premise Extension

Card

KX-T123286

Off Premise Extension

Unit

KX-T123291

Direct Inward System Access Card

KX-T123292

Direct Inward System Access Outgoing Message Card

KX-T123295

Diagnostic Card

KX-T123296

MODEM Card

: ,:.
_.:&

KX-T30860D(only)

Doorphone Adaptor

KX-T30865

Doorphone

KX-T30890

Headset

KX-A26

Battery Adaptor
::

l-l

;.:

NOTIFY

Installation

must be performed

Notify the Telephone


Before connecting
following

THE TELEPHONE

by a qualified

professional

COMPANY

installer.

Company

this equipment

to any telephone,

call the telephone

company

and inform them of the

Telephone

numbers

to which the system will be connected

........................................................

Make

...........................................................................................................................................

Model

......................... ...............................................................................................................
No. .................................................................................

FCC Registration
Ringer Equivalence
Interface

Service

Order Code

Present

Code

Network

02LS2

............................................................................................................................
Jack

prohibit

The serial number of this product

.9.OF

.....................................................................................................

connecting

Please read the section on Telephone

this unit to a party line, or to a coin operated

Company

and FCC Requirements

and Responsibilities

RJ 1 1

telephone.

on page 6-9.

may be found on the label affixed to the side of the unit. You

should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided
record of your purchase

0.4B

.....................................................................................................................

Interface

FCC Regulations

MODEL

KX-T12321 1 D

See the attach serial No. plate C-J


the unit

.............................................................................................................................

Facility

Required

Panasonic

to aid in identification

and retain this book as a permanent

in the event of theft.

NO . : KX-T123211 D

SERIAL NO. :

ln this installation

Manual, the model No. KX-T123211 D is abbreviated

to KX-T12321 I.
:

For your future reference


DATE OF PURCHASE

NAME OF DEALER

DEALERS

ADDRESS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Quick

..............................................
Reference
...........................................
Location

Name and
Installation

....................................................

Connection
Central Office Li& &$&ttdn
;cO; ;h&uih Sj 1: 1: 1: 1: 1: 1: 1: 1: : 1: 1:
Extension Connection ...........................................
...........................
Polarity Sensitive Telephone Connection
.............................................
Printer Connection
.............................................
Paging Equipment
External Music Source ..........................................

1-9
2-l
2-l
2-5
2-7
2-8
2-11
2-12
2-14
2-14

Option
2-15
2_16
2_,6
2-17
2-16
2_22
2_22
2_23

Feature.. ......................................................
Central Office Line ...........................................
Extension
..................................................
............................
Direct Station Select (DSS) Console
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................
Off Premise Extension (OPX) ..................................
Doorphone
.................................................
Diagnostic ..................................................
Connection
.............................................
Card Installation
........................................
Extension Connection
.................................
Central Office Line Connection
................
DSS Console Connection (KX-Tl23240/KX-T61640)
Off Premise Extension Card ...................................
.............................
Direct Inward System Access Card
Outgoing Message Card ......................................
Diagnostic Card .............................................
MODEM Card ...............................................
.......................................
Doorphone Connection
Battery Adaptor Connection ....................................

2-25
2-26
2-27
2-29
2-30
2-31.
2-31
2-32
2-32
2-33
2-34

Programming

and

Time

Setting

....................................

System Speed Dialing (SSD) Entry .....


Extension
Operator

Assignment

has not been stored

......

Number Assignment

Paired Telephone

(see rwe)

..............

has not been stored

...........

.....

3-8

.....

3-9

Day/Night Service Mode


Switching of Service Mode

. .

3-l 0

Automatic Hold

.....

3-11

manual mode

.....

3-l 2

.....

3-13

....

3-15

Terminate

.....

3-l 6

i ............

.....

3-17

Type A

....

3-18

. . . . .i

3-19

.....

3-20

-_I

CO Hold Using DSS Button ..

Starting Time

. . . . . . 3-4
3-5

.....

Assignment

for DSS Console


Automatic

3-l
3-3

Default

System Feature
Date

..
..
. ...

..................................
.................................

Programming Instructions
Example of Programming

.......

..................

ml

Call Hunting
Setting

.......................

Hunting Type.
Toll Restriction

..................
..........................

Area Type Selection


CO Operator

Disable

............

Call-Boundary

Class. .

Toll Restriction of System


Speed ,\Dialing .................
----i

Class 1

Restriction
1-3

Allowable Exchange Code Selection . . . 1


. . . .)

Area Code Entry For CkSs 3

has not been stored

Exchange

Code Entry For Class 5 . . 1

has not been stored

Exchange

Code Entry For ChSS 7 . . 1

has not been stored

.............. 1

Hold Time Reminder

3-21

.....

has not been stored

1. . . . . .

3-Z
3-23

....s

1. . . . .

after 3 minutes

.....

3-25

Hold Recall Time Set

..............

after 30 seconds

....

3-26

Transfer

..............

after 30 seconds

....

3-27

3 rings delay

....

3-28

dial after 3 seconds

....

3-29

.....

3-30

......... ...........

,3-31

Recall Time

Call Forwarding

Starting

. .,........

Pickup Dial Delay Time


CO-to-CO

Duration

.....

Time

......

Time Limit

Station Message Detail Recording


RS-232C Communication
Parameters

(see page)

.. ..

3-32

..............

(see page)

....

3-35

Incoming/Outgoing

Call

for printing

. . . . .

System Data Dump


Duration

3-36

. ...

3-36

....

3-37

.....

3-40

Touch
. . . . . . . . . . .

No Printing

.............

All parameters

....

Time Count Start Mode

External Paging Access Tone

.......

Off Premise Extension

5 seconds after dial


1

has been added

...

Direct Inward System Access


..

Off Hook Call Announcement


System Working Report

..

. . . . . . . . . . .vj

Secret Speed Dial/One


Dial Printing

(SMDR)

..................

SMDR Parameters

Selection

10 minutes

....

(seepaw)

3-41

. .

3-42

..

Disable

3-45

...

Enable

...

3-46

...

Dumo Stat-l

3-47

.....

3-48

....

3-49

. . . . . .

3-50

...

3-51

1.

Outside Line Feature


CO Connection Assignment

......

Dial Mode (DTMF/PuIse/Call


DTMF/PuIse/CalI

Connect

Blocking)

Blocking Selection . .

Pulse Speed Selection

...

Host PBX Access Codes Assignment


Trunk Group Assignment

DTMF mode

....
...

Low speed

has not been stored

.............

Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment


Flexible Ringing Assignment

. . . m,:::

..........

3-52

(see page)
11::

3-53

Delayed Ringing Assignment


CO Mode (Normal/Direct

. . ..

3-56

Immediately

In Line/Direct

Inward System Access) Assignment


...

..

Normal mode

.....

3-57

..

3.5 seconds

....

3-60

600 m seconds

.....

3-61

350 m seconds

.....

3-62

.....

3-64

. ..

3-65

Pause Time Assignment

....

Hookswitch Flash Timing

......... ....

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal

..

Disconnect Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Designated CO Line Access

1.5seconds

Enable

Extension Feature
Extension Group Assignment

.....

. I.

....

3-66

Class 1

, ...

3-67

has not been stored

.....

3-69

Option

.. .

3-71

Disable

.....

3-72

Disable

.....

3-73

Disable

.....

3-74

Disable

.....

3-75

....

3-76

mode

.....

3-77

All oarameters

1.....

3-78

Service Class Assignment of


Toll Restriction

Extension Name

......

...

..

.....

Account Code Input Mode

Call Transfer to Outside Line

..........

Call Forwarding to Outside Line


Executive Override

........

...................

Do not Disturb Override

Doorphone

. ...

...............

Feature

Ringing Assignment

of Doorphone

Call on Hold for Standard Telephone


System Data Clear

...
.......

......................

Example of Flexible CO Button

all jack numbers can


be received call

Hold-l

.............. .....

1-5

......

.......

3-81

of EMSS Proprietary

Operation

Telephones

(K&T123235,
KX-T61620,

KX-Tl23230,
KX-T123220,
KX-Tl23250,
KX-T61631,
KX-T61630,
KX-T61650, KX-T30830, KX-T30825, KX-T30820, KX-T30850)

Making Calls
4-1
4-2

...................................
Inter Office Calling (Intercom)
..............................................
Outward Dialing
Speed Dialing
................................................
............................................
One Touch Dialing
............................................
Calling Doorphone
Operator
Distinctive

Call

4-3
4-4
4-6
4-6

................................................

Dial Tone

4-6

...........................................

When a Line is Busy


............................
Automatic Call Back Busy (Camp-On)
...........................................
Last Number Redial
.........................................
Busy Station Signaling
...................................
Executive Override (Barge-In)

Receiving

4-7
4-8
4-8
4-9

Calls
4-l 0
4-10
4-11
4-l 1
4-l 2
4-13
4-13

Answer
.....................................................
.....................................
Automatic Answer-Intercom
Dial Call Pickup
..............................................
Directed Call Pickup ...........................................
CalI Park ....................................................
Doorphone
..................................................
..........................................
Distinctive Ring Tone

While Having a Conversation


4-14
4-l 5
4-l 6
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-22
4-23
4-23

Call on Hold .................................................


Call on Exclusive Hold .........................................
Conference
..................................................
Privacy Release
..............................................
......................................
Call Transfer-To Extension
...................................
Call Transfer-To Outside Line
Call Waiting ..................................................
..........................
Call Splitting-Between
CO and Intercom
..........................................
Call Splitting-Intercom
Mute Operation
...............................................
Off Hook Call Announcement
(OHCA) .............................
Switching between Using Handset and Hands-free ...................

Paging
.....................................
All Extensions and External
All Extensions
................................................
Group
......................................................
External
...............................................
..........................................
Paging And Transfer
Answer
.....................................................

. .....

4-24
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26

Use of Other Features


.......................
Call Forwarding-All
Calls/Busy or No Answer
Call Forwarding-To Outside Line .................................
.........................................
Dial Call Pickup Deny
......................................
:. .......
Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb Override ........................................
Saved Number Redial
.........................................

1-6

4-27
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-32

Executive

Override Deny-into Extension


...........................
Switching to Tone Alerting
......................................
Background Music
............................................
Absent Message Capability
.....................................
Message Waiting
.............................................
Flexible Night Service
.........................................
External Feature Access
AccountCode
.........
.......................................
Data line Security
.............................................
Call Waiting Tone-From CO/Extension
Deny ........................
DSS Console (KX-T123240 or KX-T61640)
........................
Electronic Station Lock ............................................
Statron Status Check
..........................................
Timed Reminder .................................................
Pulse/Tone Conversion
........................................
Station Feature Clear
.........................................
Busy Lamp Field
.............................................
Power Failure Transfer .........................................
Duration Time of Call Display
...................................
Lockout
.....................................................
Mixed Station Dialing
..........................................

4-33
4-34
4-34
4-35 .
4-37
4-38
4-39
4-40
4-42
4-43
4-44
4-46
4-47
4-48
4-49
4-49
4-50
4-51
4-51
4-51
4-51

Station Programming
One Touch Access for System Features
..........................
Auto CO Hunting
.............................................
Automatic Answering Selection
..................................
Flexible CO Button ............................................
Intercom Voice Alerting Mode ...................................
Flexible DSS Button ...........................................
CO Line Ringing SeleCtiOn
.....................................
Date and Time Setting .........................................
Call Waiting Tone !%eCtiOn
....................................
Station Number Check ......................................
F3-One Touch Button Mode Selection
.........................
Station PrOgram Clear
.........................................
Cancellation of Electronic Station Lock .............................
Outgoing Message
..............................................

Operation

of a Standard

4-52
4-53
4-55
4-57
4-60
4-61
4-62
4-63
4-64
:::

4-64
4-65
4-66
4-66
4-67

Telephone

Making Calls .................................................


When a Line is Busy ..........................................
Receiving Calls ...............................................
While Having a Conversation
...................................
Paging ......................................................
Use of Other Features
.........................................
Troubleshooting
................................................
Table of System Features
........................................
List of Tones ...................................................
List of Ring Tones
..............................................
Specification
...................................................
Telephone Company and
FCC Requirements and Responsibilities
Others
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .
...............................
Phone Number Directory
..........................................
Programming Table
.............................................
Index
.........................................................

1-7

5-l
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-7

5-g
6-l
6-5
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
7-1
7-3
7-30

PROGRAMMING

FEATURE

OUTLINE
Page

Date and Time

...................

System Speed Dialing

.............

Extension

Number

Operator

........................

DSS Console
Day/Night

Service

3-8
3-9
3-l 0, 3-l 1

.................

3-l 2
3-l 5

.....................

Toll Restriction

...................

3-17

...........................

Transfer

3-25, 3-26

Recall Time

Call Forwarding
CO-to-CO

Starting Time

Duration

Message

Duration

3-27

..............

Pickup Dial Delay Time


Station

3-5

................

....................

Call Hunting
Hold

3-4

.......

Time Limit

3-29
......

Detail Recording

3-30
...

Time Count Start Mode

3-31

....

3-40

External Paging Access Tone

..........

3-41

Direct Inward System Access

..........

3-42

Off Premise Extension


System Working Report
CO Connection

3-45

................

Off Hook Call Anouncement

3-46

............

3-47

...............

...................

3-48

Dial Mode (DTMF/Pulse/Call Blocking Mode) .

3-49

Host PBX Access Codes

3-51

Trunk Group
Outward

...........

.....................

Dialing

Ringing

3-52

..................

3-53

.........................

Delayed

3-54

..................

Ringing

3-56

CO Mode .........................

3-57

Pause Time

3-60

Hookswitch
Calling

......................
Flash Timing ............

Party Control Signal

Disconnect Time

3-61

.........

3-62

....................

3-64

Automatic Designated CO Line Access

3-65

Extension

3-66

Group

---E

..................

Service Class of Toll Restriction


Extension

Extension

3-28

............

Account

Name

Code

3-67

..................

3-69

....................

Call Transfer/Call
Executive

.....

Override

Forwarding

3-71
.......

3-72, 3-73

................

Do not Disturb Override

3-74

............

3-75
.

.................................

3-76

Call on Hold for Standard


System Data Clear
1-8

..

3-77

................

Telephone

3-78

INSTALLATION

(Quick Reference)

(See page 2-7)

modular jack-

For earth ground, see page 2-2.

(See page 2-3)

l To Terminal

1. Place the templet

the Central

(included) on the wall


to mark the 3 screw positions.

2. Install the 3 screws

&r::.-s

.....

Jacks from

into the wall.

3. Hook the unit on the screw heads.

Board or Modular
Office (CO).

(See page 2-8)


0 To use a screw-attach-type

50 pin connector.

-__+

templet
m___ _ _... +
El

(See page 2-4)


1. Unscrew

the front cover of the unit.


There are four screws.

2. Open the front cover in the direction


the arrow @.

To Extensions (jack number 9 through


To Extensions (jack number 1 through 8)

of

Proprietary
26 AWG:
24AWG:
22 AWG:

(See page 2-4)

Telephone
Under 460 feet
Twisted
Under 750 feet
Under1 180. feet I

Standard Telephone
26 AWG: Under 2290 feet
24 AWG: Under 3700 feet
22 AWG: Under 5900 feet

1
1

Twisted

16)

cable

cable

Cable Pin Numbers to be connected


n

Connection of the Proprietary Telephone


(4-conductor wiring is required for each
extension.)
Connect the pin number of T, PI, Dl and
D2 only.

Connection of the KX-Tl23235 (Proprietary


Telephone) (6-conductor wiring is required for
each extension.)

LC-3

LC-4

T
R

JACK
No.17

7
33
8
34

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

ORN-RED
RED-GRN
GRN-RED
RED-BRN
BRN-RED
RED-SLT

l--i
9

35

JACK
No.2

D1
;;

JACK
No.3

JACK
No.10

Dt
;:

JACK
No.18

41
16
42
17
43
18

JACK
No.6

34
35
36
37
38
39

JACK

BRN-VI0

48

50
25

1
1

VIO-SLT
SLT-VI0

1
1

4g
50

1
I

T : Tip
R : Ping

Dl : Data 1
D2 : Data 2

Pl
P2

Pl
P2

T
R

T
R

D1
;:

JACK
No.26

pt
;:

P2

P2

P2

T
R

T
R

Dt
E:

JACK
No.11

pt
;:

JACK
No.19

Dl
D2
Pl
P2
T
R
Dl
D2
Pi
P2
T
R
Dl

JACK
No.13

JACK
No.14

JACK

P2

D1
;:

JACK
No.27

P2

P2

T
R

T
R

Dt
;:

JACK
No.21

p1
;:

JACK
No.28

P2

P2

T
R

T
R

n1
;;

JACK
No.29

D
;;

P2

P2

P2

T
R
D!

T
R

pt
D2

JACK
No.22

JACK
No.30

p2

p1
p2

PI
P2

PI
P2

PI
P2

T
R
Dl

T
R
Dl

T
R
Dl

JACK
No.23

JACK
No.31

;:

;:

P2

P2

:I
;:

JACK
Nb.32

:I
D2
PI
P2

P2

Pl : 3 Pair Voice
P2 : 3 Pair Voice
c

l-10

p1
;:

T
R

P2

w Connection of a Standard Telephone


(2-conductor wiring is required for each
extension.)
Connect the pin number of T and R
only.

p1
;:

P2

JACK
No.24
24

pf
D2

T
R

JACK
No.20

JACK
No.5

JACK
No.25

P2

P2

27
28
29
30
31
32
33

Dl
p2

T
R

IT

BLK-BRN
BRN-BLK
BLK-SLT
SLT-BLK
YEL-BLU
BLU-YEL
YEL-ORN
ORN-YEL
YEL-GRN
GRN-YEL
YEL-BRN
BRN-YEL
YEL-SLT

T
R

(see page 2-14.)


Speaker
Amplifier

(See page 2-12.)

w:l-l
KX-T123211

Paging
jack 1

000 I/=====
Paging Equipment

1
Paging
jack 2

Serial Printer
Serial Interface
(RS232C)
Paging Equipment
l Cables

must be shielded
length is 6.5 feet.

Zrcuit
Type

Pin
No.

AA
BA

FG
TXD

1
2

BB
CB

RXD
CTS

3
5

cc
AB

DSR
SG

WV

External

t-l-

TXD

BA

20
7

DTR
SG

CD
AB

CTS
DSR
DCD

CB
CC
CF

Communication parameters
If the Panasonic printer which is used has a
(KX- Pl 1 D or KX- P17) board and is connected
to the KX-T123211, set the communication
parameters the followina.

7bit
(default)

Baud
Rate

SWl-1

Program to SWl-2
EVEN
(see page
3-32.)
SWl-3

ON

SWl-5

ON

SWl-6

12008
(default)

ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

SWl-1
SWi-2
SWl-3

OFF
OFF
ON

OFF

SWl-6

ON

SW15
SWl-6
SWl-7
swl-a

Protocol / fO~COO,,,

~2-a

Music Sour

EXT hiusic Jack

(See page 2-14.)

Printer RS-232C

RS-232C

Signal
Name

and the maximum

Connection Chart:
KX-T123211

KX-M 23211

OFF

OFF

The optional cards are following.


Model No
Ixpansion

1. To protect the printed circuit board from


static electricity, first discharge any body
static by touching the metal board.
2. Loosen the screws to remove the metal
board.
3. The location of the optional cards for the
KX-T123211 is shown in the following.

Description

Cards

KX-T123270

This card adds 8 Extensions.

KX-T123271

This card adds 4 Extensions.

metal board
KX-Tl23280

rhis card adds 4 COs.

KX-T123281

rhis card adds 2 COs

1% Console Card
KX-Tl23241

The DSS Console requires the


ISS Console Card for the
Iperation.
Sciews

Iff Premise
Ixtension (OPX) Card
KX-T123285
Hf Premise
Ixtension (OPX) Unit

DISA-A Card
KX-Tl23291
Enables a Standard telephone
nstalled outside the premise tc
work as well as an extension.

DISA OGM
Card
KX-T123292

KX-T123286
Direct Inward System
kcess (DISA) Cards
KX-T123291
Outgoing Message
Card
KX-T123292

Diagnostic Card
KX-T123295
MODEM Card
KX-T123296

Enables to access System from


outside of System.

MODEM Card
KX-T12329ti

DISA -I
Card
KX-T 1

Diagnostic Card
KX-T123295
/

.OPX Card
KX-T123285
In case access from outside by
installed this card, enable to sent
the recorded Message instead of
dial tone.

Diagnosis of System can be


done.

This card is necessary for data


communication with remote.

Expansion Card
KX-T123270 (8 Extensions.)
KX-T123271 (4 Extensions)

1-12

KX-Tl23280
KX-T123281

(4 COs)
(2 COs)

DSS Console Connection


(KX-T123240 / KX-T61640)

Extension Connection
(Jack number 17 through 32)
(See page 2-26.)

50 pin
(Amphenol

Jack no. -I
17 through 24

Optional DSS Console


KX-T123241
\

II

II

i l+Jack
no.
2.5 through

Card

32

57JE

To Extensions (jack number 2.5 through


28, or 25 through 32)
To Extensions (jack number 17 through
20, or 17 through 24)

(See page 2-29.)

Optional Expansion Card


KX-T123270
(8 Extensions)
KX-Tl23271
(4 Extensions)

DSS Console,

Pair Telephone
Y

Central Office Line Connection


(CO9 through 12)

(See page 2-31.)

pair

lThe DSS Console (KX-Tl23240


Optional
\[

Expansion
KX-Tl23280
KX-Tl23281

or
KX-T61640) needs a paired Telephone (EMSS
Proprietary Telephone) for proper operation,
because the DSS console cannot work by
itself.
lWhen using the DSS Console, program must
be done. See page 3-10.

Card
(4 COs)
(2 COs)

modular
jack
Use 2-conductor
wiring cord
\

To Terminal Board or Modular


from the Central Office (CO).

Jacks
l-13

Direct Inward System Access


Card (KX-T123291)

.Off Premise Extension


(OPX) Card (KX-T123285)

(See page 2-31.)

(See page 2-30.)


Off Premise
Extension Card
(KX-Tl23285)

Direct Inward System Access Cards


KX-T123291
DISA-IS Card

Off Premise Extension


KX-T123286
\
Power Switch
I
\

DISA-A

Card

Outgoing Message Card


(KX-T123292)

Unit

(for Direct Inward System Access)

II

OPX-1

OPX-2

(See page 2-31.)

Outgoing Message
Card KX-T123292
\
Jack number 32
Jack number 31
\

Use 2-conductor

wiring

/4

cord

0 Programming must be done to use this feature.


Refer to Off Premise Extension on page 3-45.

l For how to record Outgoing

Outgoing

I-14

Message,
Message on page 4-67.

refer to
.

$I
!

Doorphone Connection

Diagnostic Card
(KX-T123295)

(See page 2-33.)

(See page 2-32.)

Diagnostic

Card

adaptor connector
into connector on

w The following

4-conductor

optional cards are necessary.

On-site administration
Card KX-T

l Diagnostic

23295

Remote administration
Card KX-T 23295
l Direct Inward System Access Cards
KX-T123291
l MODEM Card KX-T123296

l Diagnostic

wiring

MODEM Card
(KX-T123296)

_)
26 AWG : Under 230 feet
24 AWG : Under 370 feet
22 AWG : Under 590 feet

Twisted

cable

1Battery Adaptor Conmction (KX-A26)


I

(See page 2-34.)

(See page 2-32.)

KX-T123211

MODEM Card
KX-T123296

Automobil type batteries


0 Consisting

1-15

of two 12 VDC (24 VDC)

PROGRAMMING

(Quick Reference)

Svstem
Feature
_
i-0 SET
late

PROGRAM
ADDRESS

STEPS REQUIRED

TO CHANGE

PROGRAM

PAGE

DEFAULT

FOR

PROGRAb

and Time

&zi@QiLq~FYl

: . . . . . .AM , PM

l.....minute

System Speed
3ialing Entry
Nothing is stored
Trunk Group
... . . . . . . . . ..Speed

accesscode(OOthrough99)

Extension
Number
Assignment
:.....dial
:.........,until
Dperator
Assignment

the extension

the desired

number (lOOthrough

101 : jack number


l!l2 : jack number

01
02

131 : jack number


132 : jack number

31
32

3-8

7-3

3-9

7-3

3-10

7-3

With Transfer

3-11

7-3

Manual

3-12

7-4

199)

jack number appears

~&$$&l~
i. dial the jack number which is set operator (01 through 32)

Nothing is stored

. . . ..- until the desired operator number appears


Paired Telephone
Assignment for
XS Console

lNEXTllNEXTl~&zKllhllEMORY~lNFXTlICD
..... jack number paired
with console 2

. . . . jack number paired with console 1


4utomatic
bfoJsing

CO

DSS

kd

k&d

With
Day/Night
Mode

m
Transfer I Without Transfer

Service
la

Lay-m
. . . . ..Manual

Service

jack number 01
: console 1
jack number 02
: console 2

/ Automatic

Mode

Starting Time

f- until the desired day of the week appears


m

ti

ml

@mFmb;r

FCl;

! - minute

!--AM

1 PM

L starting time for day service (hour)


Starting time for night service (hour)

Day Service
: 9:OOAM
Night Service
: 5:OOPM
every day of
the week

1-16

>

TO SET

PROGRAM
ADDRESS

STEPS REQUIRED

TO CHANGE

:all Hunting

PROGRAM

DEFAULT

,.

PAGE

FOR
DETAILS

PROGRA
TABLE

all 8 extension
groups : Disable

3-15

7-4

all 8 extension
groups : Terminate

3-16

7-4

Type A

3-18

7-5

Class 1

3-19

7-5

Restriction

3-20

7-5

Nothing is stored

3-21

7-5

Nothing is stored

3-22

7-5

Nothing is stored

3-23

7-6

Nothing is stored

3-24

7-6

I
la

Setting

m+
y=MM

!..........

Disable / Enable

:......until the desired extension group number appears

Hunting Type

la

kza
/ Circular

. . . . . ..Terminate

:....
until the desired extension group number appears

011Restriction
h

Area Type
Selection

I......

CO Operator
Call-Boundary
Class
Toll Restriction
of System Speed
Dialing

Allowable
Exchange
Selection

lNEXTl_lNlEMORYI

hll

Type A I Type 0 I Type C

lNEXTlLqzizFl~
.........dial

11

the boundary

lNEXTllSELECTllkzKK-lI[
:......

Restriction!

+
m

IN

Code

Entry

No restriction

INEXTI lG%J

~MWI~FW

I m

:.....exchangecodewith3digits
:........until

;re;li;;;

class number (1 through 8)

IN

k$

=I

the desired

memory code number appears

IMEM~RY 1m
i....- area code with 3 digits

:..........
until the desired memory code number appears
Exchange Code
Entry for Class 5

IjJ

IN

+
INEXT~ ~

I
IMEMOFW

I~

-...- exchange code with 3 digits


:..........
until the desired memory code number appears

Exchange Code
Entry for Class 7

I
~

IMEMORY]
:.....exchange

~
code with 3 digits

:.........,
until the desired memory code number appears

1-17

TO SET
Direct Inward
System Access
(DISA)

PROGRAM
ADDRESS

STEPS REQUIRED

TO CHANGE

PROGRAM

DEFAULT

PAGE
FOR
DETAILS

PROGRAI
TABLE

(Control code x)
1311
Enable

jKFlISELECTIFlYEMORYl

:....- Enable / Disable


3-42

7-10

(Prolong time)
5 minutes

lNEXTlISELECT1FJMEMORY1
:....-

(Answer

2 min / 3 min / 4 min / 5 min

delay time)
10 seconds

(NEXTIISELECTIFlUEMORYl
:....-

0 set / 5 set I 10 set I 15 set

(Tone detect)
Enable

lNEXTlISELECTIFFKiq
....-

Enable / Disable

(Security type)
Trunk Security

LNEXTlISELECTIFlMEMORYl
....-

None Security / Trunk Security


I All Security

(Remote security code)


Remote Code: 70000

lNEXTI_No.
:....-

4 digits (0000 through 9999)

(User security code)


NEXT SELECT
00~~00

SELECT

CODENo
:....-

:.....

Oft Premise
Extension

b21

b31

Kzl

4 digits (0000 through 9999)

User Code 1 / User Code 2


User Code 3 / User Code 4

User Code 2:60000


User Code 3:60000
User Code 4:60000

3-45

7-11

3-46

7-l 1

3-47
.

7-l 1

Disable / Enable

Enable
Disable I Enable

Dump Start

IKFl~lKzllENDl
:....-

User Code I:60000

Disable

HFIYEMORYIlENOl
:.....

System
Working
Report

END

lNEXT~lKK-RvlIKil
:.....

Ott Hook Call


Announcement
(OHCA)

MEMORY

Dump Start I Dump Stop / SWR Data Clear

1-18

TO SET
Hold Time
Reminder

Hold Recall
Time Set

Transfer
Recall
Time

El

Refer to page 3-25

Refer to page 3-26

la
I

Call Forwarding
Starting Time
Pickup Dial
Delay Time

7-6

7-7

7-7

Refer to page 3-29

SMDR
RS-232C
Communication
Parameters

7-6

7-6

Refer to page 3-28

lzl

Refer to page 3-27

El

External Paging
Access Tone

Outside

7-7

Refer to page 3-30

lzil
I

Refer to page 3-32

7-7

SMDR
Parameters

lzl

Refer to page 3-35

7-8

Incoming/
Outgoing Call
Selection for
printing

lzl

Refer to page 3-36

7-8

Secret Speed
Dial/One Touch
Dial Printing

Refer to page 3-36

7-8

El

Duration Time
Count Start Mode

7-9

Refer to page 3-41

PRO G RAM M I N-G P;~;;M

lzl

System Data
Dump

co-to-co
Duration Time
Limit

;E;;,

Refer to page 3-37

7-g

Refer to page 3-40

Line Feature

TO SET
CO Connection
Assignment

PROGRAM
ADDRESS

STEPS REQUIRED

PROGRAM

DEFAULT

PAGE
FOR
DETAILS

PROGRAM
TABLE

c
INEXTI lsELECTl

IMEMORY I lENol

*........:........until

TO CHANGE

Connect / Not Connect

the desired

all COs

: Connect

3-48

7-12

all Cos

: DTMF

3-49

7-12

: Low Speed

S-50

7-12

: CO 1
: CO 2
: CO 3
: CO 4
: CO 5
: CO 6
: CO 7
: CO 8, CO 9
co1o,co11
co 12

3-52

7-13

CO number appears

Dial Mode
DTMF ! Pulse /
Call Blocking
Selection

lzil

mI$z+z=la
*..........until

Pulse Speed
Selection

I Pulse I Call Blocking

.-.-.......DTMF

14

the desired

CO number appears

Ifi&VEl
:........a.

Low Speed / High Speed

all COs

i.........'
until the desired CO number appears
Trunk Group
Assignment

14

lNEXrlINEXiJq&zl~
s...*.....

dial the trunk group number (1 through 8)

s...... until the desired

CO number appears

i-19

Trunk-G1
Trunk-G2
Trunk-G3
Trunk-G4
Trunk-G5
Trunk--G6
Trunk-G7
Trunk-G8

TO SET

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

PROGRAM
ADDRESS

PAGE
- FOR
DETAILS

PROGRAI
TABLE

other CO number

-lexible
3utward

DEFAULT

Dialing

Yssignment

other jack number


t

1
IGI

=@

I.@-

IrdEW~yIGGl

Day Mode

:......Enable
:......until
:......-until

/ Disable

all jack
numbers

: Enable

all jack
numbers

: Enable

all jack
numbers

: Enable

all jack
numbers

: Enable

all COs

: Normal

3-53

7-14

3-53

7-15

3-54

7-16

3-54

7-17

3-57

7-22

the desired jack number appears

the desired

CO number appears

other CO number
other jack number
+

1
Night Mode

Gl

Ga

NYXT 9V

~oRyF~
:......Enable

:......until
:......-until

/ Disable

the desired jack number appears

the desired

CO number appears

other CO number
-lexible

Ringing

4ssignment
Day Mode

other jack number


+

1
m

k;XT

3Y

lMHWRyFUJ
:......Enable

:......until
:......-until

I Disable

the desired jack number appears

the desired

CO number appears

other CO number
other jack number
f
Night Mode

IzJ

~&4~lMHYlQUW
:......Enable
:......until

/ Disable

the desired jack number appears

:......-untilthedesiredCOnumberappears
>O Mode
Normal/DIUDISA)
lssignment

1511

l Selecting Normal or DISA mode

I
lbm9ORY hd
. ... .. ... .. ... Normal
, DlSA

Day Mode

lrJFXT
y(TI T
:........until
l Selecting

the desired

CO number appears

DIL mode

I
=+

. . DIL

..........

Night Mode

l Selecting

p-RYI~
...........

Dial jack number

until the desired

CO number appears

Normal or DISA mode


+

INE~TI LSS

IME~~ORYI m
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal , ,,lSA

i........until

. Selecting

INEXTl~

the desired

CO number appears

DIL mode
+

Iw
... DIL !. ... . ... .. Dialjacknumber
.......... until the desired CO number appears
ISELECT~ m

IMEMORY

I -3n

.
all COs

: Normal

3-57

7-22

TO SET

I,$;:;2

PROGRAM MING ( P;;;~J

Host PBX Access

El

Codes

7-12

Refer to page 3-51

Assignment

7-18
7-19

Delayed Ringing

1
Assignment

Refer to page 3-56

149)

Calling Party
Refer to page 3-62

7-23

7-20
7-21

Refer to page 3-64

7-24

7-23

Refer to page 3-65

7-24

Control (CPC)

Extension

Assignment

Refer to page 3-56

EEI

Pause Time

Night Mode

(53(

Refer to page 3-60

Feature

TO SET
fxtension

tOGRAM
)DRESS

IEI

Sroup

STEPS REQUIRED
t
[NFXTI +

issignment

IiEl

roll Restriction
Day Mode

;.......until

Night Mode

the desired

El

the desired
I
[MEMORY

:....-dial
:.......until
Zall Transfer
Line

PROGRAM

D EFAU LT

all jack

: EXT

GRP-1

FOR
ETAILS

OGRAh
-ABLE

3-66

7-25

3-67

7-25

3-67

7-26

3-72

7-27

numbers

jack number appears

I
@ ~F~O~Y 1l-d
i.... dial the service class number (1 through 8)

Service Class
Yssignment of

TO CHANGE

I
g hVMoRYlkk4Jd
:..... dial the extension group number (1 through 8)

i-......until

To Outside

Signal

Dav Mode

all jack
numbers

: Class

all jack
numbers

: Class 1

jack number appears

I~

the service class number (1 through 8)

the desired jack number appears

yv-w
;- Enable / Disable
i.......until

all jack
numbers

: Disable

the desired jack number appears

Zall Forwarding
-0 Outside

Line

la
:- Enable / Disable
;.......until

Excecutive
Override

all jack
numbers

: Disable

7-27

all jack
numbers

: Disable

7-27

all jack
numbers

: Disable

7-28

the desired jack number appears

El

[m

IMFM~RY

I lENDl

:- Enable / Disable
i.. . . . . . until the desired jack number appears
Do not Disturb
Override

El
*......-

Enable / Disable

..... until the desired jack number appears

l-21

Extension
Name

;;;;g

I I

TO SET

PROG RAM M IN G ,,E

Ringing
Assignment
of Doorphone
Day Mode

7-26

Refer to page 3-69

IGI

TO SET

Night

TO SET

STEPS REQUIRED

ROGRAM
DDRES.5

TO CHANGE

;;;;$F

PROGRAMMING

~2

lrel

Refer to page 3-76

7-28

1711

Refer to page 3-76

7-29

Mode

DEFAULT

PROGRAM

PI
FOd
2EwL

System Data
Clear

IEI

l All Parameters

0 System Parameter
Dial

All Parameters

l Speed

m[

+
1
ISELECT~ IMEMORY

I m

3-78

....... All Para / System Para / CO Para / EXT Paral


DSS Para / Speed Dial
0 CO Parameter

IEEl

l@l k!dFMoRy IENd


:.....dial

:.........
l EXT Parameter

CO number (01 through

12)

until the CO Para appears

I
=v-&J-w
:.... dial jack number (01 through 32)
:..........until

the EXT Para appears

l DSS Parameter

i....-dial
-........-

DSS number (1 or 2)

until the DSS Para appears

l-22

;E
ROGRAI

OPERATION

FOR EMSS PROPRIETARY

TELEPHONE

(Quick Reference)

MAKING CALLS
l Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button first.
l After finishing your conversation,
hang up the handset

For further
details, see

or

press the SP-PHONE button.

INTER OFFICE
(Intercom)

CALLING

page
below
Dial extension

no. (100 through

199)

OUTWARD DIALING
Individual Line Access
Automatic

4- 1

4-2

Line Access

4-2

Individual Trunk
Group Access

4-3

SPEED DIALING

Dial speed access code (00 through 99)

4-3

ONE TOUCH DIALING

(Press the PROGRAMMABLE


FEATURE button.)

4-4

WHEN A LINE IS BUSY


AUTOMATIC CALL BACK
BUSY
For Outside Calls

For Intercom

Calls

BUSY STATION
SIGNALING

LAST NUMBER

EXECUTIVE
(Barge-in)

4-8

REDIAL

Fim

4-8

OVERRIDE
Into Extension
4-9

Into CO

l-23

RECEIVING CALLS
ANSWER

DIAL CALL PICKUP

WHILE HAVING A CONVERSATION


CALL ON HOLD

To leave a call on hold

To retrieve
(Outside

calls on hold)

l at the holding

l from another

q
b

I
I
I
; (Intercom

extension

slowly

I l at the holding

extension

4- 14

i l from another extension


,

extension

flashing
[ in red

call on hold)

1
I

CONFERENCE
4- 16

CALL TRANSFERTO EXTENSION


To Transfer after the
Other Extension Answers

4- 18

TO OUTSIDE LINE
To transfer after the
Other Outside party
Answers
CALL WAITING
To leave

the Original

Call on Hold and Talk to


the New Caller

4- 19

p-Ez&-j~)piLiKGq
while original

call is on hold

4 - 20

l To terminate

the original call and talk to the new caller,


you need not to press the HOLD button.

PAGING
Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
I
PAGING ALL
EXTENSIONS
To Access

button first.

4 - 24

PAGING GROUP
To Access
ANSWER
To Paging through
Built-in Speaker

4 - 26
1-24

OTHER FEATURES
l
l

Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE button first.


After hearing confirmation tone (1 or 2 beeps), hang up the handset

ZALL FORWARDING
All Calls

or press the SP-PHONE

button.

Setting

4 - 27
Busy or No Answer

To Outside

Setting

(You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9)

Line

4 - 29

To cancel

DIAL CALL PICKUP DENY

4 - 27
4 - 29
I
! To cancel

Setting

4 - 30

DO NOT DISTURB

i
I To cancel

Setting

4 - 31

DO NOT DISTURB
3VERRIDE

4BSENT MESSAGE
ZAPABILITY

4-32

~~~~1

Setting
Messagel.

Will Return Soon

Message2.

Gone Home

Message3.

At Ext 1extension

4 - 35

To cancel

MESSAGE WAITING
To Leave the Message.

To Call the extension


which sent the message
from the Extension which
the Message

is left.

To Cancel the Message


which is left in the
extension.

At the extension

l-25

no.1

OTHER FEATURES

(CONT.)
I

FLEXIBLE

NIGHT

(Extension
01 only)

of jack no

SAVED

NUMBER

SERVICE

REDIAL

i To cancel

Setting

Programming

Dialing
4 - 32

TIMED

REMINDER

Setting

4 - 48
_---------------__----a_____________

1 To confirm

To cancel

STATION
CLEAR

@Following features

FEATURE

the setting

time

can be canceled.

Dial Call

Pickup Deny, Do Not Disturb, Call Forwarding,


Call Waiting Tone Deny, Data Line Security,
Absent message capability,Background
Executive Override Deny-into Extension,
Message Waiting, Timed Reminder.

STATION
l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle

PROGRAMMING

and the SP-PHONE

button is off.

l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM


l After programming,
return the MEMORY switch to SET.

AUTO CO HUNTING
Prime Line PreferenceOutgoing
Idle Line PreferenceOutgoing
AUTOMATIC ANSWERING
SELECTION
Prime Line PreferenceIncoming
No Line PreferenceIncoming

Setting

4 - 49

Music,

first.

ITo cancel
4 - 53

Setting

~TOcancel

Setting

ITo cancel
4 - 55
I
fTo cancel
4 - 56

STATION PROGRAMMING

(cont.)

FLEXIBLE CO BUTTON
To change into other
CO button

4-- 57

To assign into trunk


group access button

4 - 57

To change
button

4 - 58

into DSS

To change into other


all CO button

4 - 59

To change into message


waiting button

4 - 59
III

INTERCOM VOICE
ALERTING MODE
CO LINE RINGING
SELECTION

Setting (Voice call)

i To cancel (Signal call)


4 - 60

pgpqm
(01 through 12)

OUTGOING MESSAGE
[Extension of jack on 01 only)

4 - 62

To record

4 -67
To play back only

(Will hear message)


STATION
CHECK

NUMBER
4 - 64

F&ONE TOUCH BUTTON


MODE SELECTION
(for KX-T30850, KX-T30825,
KX-T61650, KX-T123250)
STATION
CLEAR

4 - 65
2: for DND/ FWD/Account

code

PROGRAM
0 Following programs can be reset to the
Auto CO Hunting, Automatic Answering
Intercom Voice Alerting Mode, CO Line
Selection, Call Waiting Tone Selection,
Button Mode Selection.

default data.
Selection,
Ringing
F3-One Touch

4 - 66

NAME AND LOCATION

Alarm Indicator

Reset Button-,

Day Indicator
Power Indicator
Power Switch
External

Music Jack
Battery Backup
Connector

.
EIA Connector
(RS-232C)

INSTALLATION
Installation
Cautions
l

Avoid installing in the following places. (Doing so may result in malfunction, noise, or discoloration.)
sunlight and hot, cold, or humid places. (Temperature range:32F-104F)
Sulfuric gases produced in areas where there are thermal springs, etc. may damage the equipment or
contacts.
Places in which shocks or vibrations are frequent or strong.
Dusty places, or places where water or oil may come into contact with the unit.
Near high-frequency
generating devices such as sewing machines or electric welders.
On or near computers, telexes, or other office equipment, as well as microwave ovens or air conditioners.
(It is preferable not to be installed in the same room with the above equipment_)
Install at least 6 feet from televisions. (both the electronic modular switching system and EMSS proprietary
telephones)
Do not obstruct area around the electronic modular switching system. (for reasons of maintenance
and
nspection-be
especially careful to allow space for cooling above and at the sides of the electronic modular
switching system)

1. In direct

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Wiring
Cautions
1. Do not wire the telephone

cable in parallel with an AC power source, computer, telex, etc. If the cables are
run near those wires, shield the cables with metal tubing or use shielded cables and ground the shields.
2. If cables are run on the floor, use protectors or the like to protect the wires where they may be stepped
on. Avoid wiring under carpets.
3. Avoid using the same 120 VAC power supply outlet for computers, telexes, and other office equipment.
Otherwise, the KX-T123211s system operation may be interrupted by the induction noise from such
.
.
equipments.
4. Please use one pair telephone wire for extension connection of (telephone) equipments such as standard telephone,
data terminal, answering machine, COmpUter etc., except proprietary telephone (KX-Tl23230, KX-T123220,
KX-T123250 etc.,).

2-l

1. Unscrew

the front cover of the unit.

screws

There are four screws.


2. Open the front cover in the
direction

screws
=0

of arrow @

When a power failure takes place, there is no memory loss except for the camp-on, saved number redial, the last
number redial, Call park and Message waiting. During power failure, memory is protected by 21 day rechargeable battery.
rechargeable
battery.
1. Connect

the battery (included)

as shown

(Fig.1)
2. Install the battery into the battery
compartment.
l

Replace

(Fig.2)

Fig.1.

the battery every 5 years

with (P-OlH-F2Gl).

To remove

connector,

the lock to release

depress

and slide (pull) apart connector.

(Fig3)

depress

Fig.3

2-4

CONNECTION
l

The Power Switch of the KX-T123211 must be off during wiring.


After all the wiring

Mis-Wiring

are completed,

may cause

turn the Power Switch ON.

the KX-T123211 to operate

improperly.

Refer to During Installation page 6-l and During Connection page e-2.
l

50 pin configuration

Max. length and kind of wire

and Color coding

(Refer to page 2-10.)


(Refer to pages 2-8; 2-29, 2-30 and 2-34.)
l

Insertion

of Option Card

(Refer to page 2-25.)


0

Connection

of printer

(Refer to page 2-12.)


0

If an extension does not operate properly (for example : The LCD of the KX-T123235/KXYT123230/KX-T61
KX-T61630/KX-T30830

631/

does not display properly.), disconnect the telephone from the extension line and then

connect again, or turn OFF the power switch of the KX-T123211 and then ON again.
l

This product is equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin. This plug
will only fit into a grounding-type
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug
into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the
grounding-type
plug.
l In areas of frequent
electrical storms and/or power failures, we recommend for additional equipment
protection, surge protectors such as TELESPIKE
BLOK MODEL TSB (TRIPPE MFG. CO.), SPIKE BLOK
MODEL SK6-0 (TRIPPE MFG. CO.), Super MAX (PANAMAX)
or MPl (ITW LINX).
Paging Speaker

1
0

Paging Speaker

Avoid using the same AC outlet for


office equipment and KX-T123211.
Use dedicated AC outlet only.

AC Surge

.Batterv

Protector

Adaotor

KX-A26

Automobil type
batteries
_
Radio

2-5

Consisting
I

of two 12VDC

(24VDC)
.

ti
;I

Standard Telephone

Off Premise Extension Unit

&

r__________-___-__________,

I
I
I
I

I
I
I

(C.O. Surge

I
I

I
I

I
I
I

2 of 32 extensions

I
:

2
;
_--_

Initial
12 CO Lines

Protector)

____---___---,

r----------I
I

I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I

i KX-Tl23240
KX-T61640
i___________________--_i

I
L_______________________-_i

32Extension

(one pair)
c

toC06
1
----~-~~~---~~---__--~~~
r
I
toco7
I
toC08
I
I
toco9
I
I
to co
10 addition
I
I
11
taco
I
I
to co 12 _

Lines

16 Extension Lines=lnitial
~---~~~--~--~~----~~~--,
116 Extension Lines.addition

(two

L_-____________________~

pair)

I
I

I
I

I
I
I

extension connected
to jack number 1

1
KX-T61631

Standard
Telephone

7
1
i

KX-Tl23230

(two pair)

KX-T30830

0 Extension

or KX-Tl23235
connected

:two pair)

KX-Tl23230

or KX-T123235.

KX-T61630
(two pair)

KX-T30820
Data Terminal

KX-T123235

(two pair)

KX-T61620
(two oair)

KX-T30850
KX-Tl23220
:twq pair)
Phone
KX-T61650
KX-T123250

KX-T30825

Telephone
with Answering
Machine

jack

number 1 must always be a

I
;
I
I
L--J

need Optional

Cards or Adaptor

l Parallel

connections
is impossible.

0 When the KX-T30830 is connected to the KX-T123211, enter


DSS Number or One Touch Dialing Button to DSS button.
See page 4-61.
2-6

of telephone

We recommend

that telephone

Insert the modular

CO jack is used RJll.

plug of the telephone

line cord (2-conductor

wiring)

into the

modular jack on the KX-T123211.

R : Ring
T : Tip

View of TEL Jack (CO)

To Terminal

Board or Modular

from the Central

Jacks

G7

Office (CO).
\
Use 2-conductor
wiring

cord

Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211 to operate improperly.


See During Installation page 6-1 and During Connection page 6-2
before connecting.

co

co
co
co

2-7

To connect jack number 1 through 8 and 9


through 16, insert connector to the KX-T123211
as shown right.

Jack no
1 through 8

Jack no
9 through 16

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Extensions

(jack number

1 through

To Extensions

(jack number 9 through

8)
16 )

+
*

Cable Pin Numbers to be connected


See page 2-10.
l The max. length of the extension

line cord (twisted cable) that connects the KX-T123211 and the extension

is shown below.

26 AWG: Under 460 feet


24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

6 AWG: Under 2290 fe


24 AWG: Under 3700 feet
22 AWG: Under 5900 feet

I
I
I
.

I
0

If a telephone or answering machine with an A-Al relay is connected to the KX-Tl23211,


relay switch of the telephone or answering machine to OFF.

Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211 to operate improperly.


See During Installation page 6-1 and During Connection page 6-2 before connecting.
2-8

,I
set the A-Al

50-pin
To connect Amphenol 57JE type (screw-attach-type
connector) to the KX-T123211, follow the procedure below.

1.

4.

Loosen the three screws to move the metal


bar aside.
Metal bar

To attach the Amphenol 57JE type


(PLUG) to the connector, drive the
accessory Screw at the upper part,
and fasten the accessory Wire Tie
around the lower hook-pin and the
Amphenol 57JE type, as shown.

317

50-pin*
connector

Screws
Hook-.pin

2.

Accessary
Wire Tie

Pull the Expansion Card (LC#l)

3. The 50-pin connector (JACK) on the


Expansion Card has two hook-pins.
Remove the upper hook-pin, taking
out the screw.

/Expansion
Card

When connecting

a connector of the type shown

below, unscrew the lower hook-pin, too. Then drive


both accessory

Screws.

Expansion

Card

,50-pin
connector

5d-pin

2-9

Aonnector

5.

Replace the Expansion Card (LC#l).

6.

To connect to the other Expansion Card


(LC#2), repeat the steps 2 to 5.

7.

Replace the bar and tighten the screws.

Cable Pin Numbers to be connected


l Connection of the KX-T123235 (Proprietary
Telephone)
Dl : Data 1 Pl : 3 Pair Voice
T : Tip
R : Ring D2 : Data 2 P2 : 3 Pair Voice
0 Connection of the Proprietary Telephone
Connect the only pin number of T, R, Dl and
D2.
CABLE
COLOR

CLIP
NO

26

WHT-BLU

1
27
2
28
3

BLU-WHT
WHT-ORN
ORN-WHT
WHT-GRN
GRN-WHT

1
2
3
4
5
6

29
4

WHT-BRN
BRN-WHT

7
8

23
19

GRN-VI0
VIO-BRN

24
50
25

BRN-VI0
VIO-SLT
SLT-VI0

46
47
48
49
50

ONN
PIN

Station wrnng (Y-Parr twtsteu cablrng):


50 Pi

Bridging Clips

0 Connection of a Standard Telephone


Connect the only pin number of T and R.

LC-1

LC-2
T

JACK
No.1

No.8

DI
D2

JACK
No.9

~1
D2

T
R

T
R

LC-4

LC-3

JACK
No.17

D1
D2

JACK
No.25

R
Dj
D2

Pl
P2

PI
P2

Pi
P2

Pl
P2

T
R

T
R

T
R

T
R

;:
P2

No.16

;:
P2

No.24

E:
P2

,No.32

E;
P2

If the telephone you are using with the KX-T123211 is polarity sensitive.

1. Connect all extension wiring to the KX-T123211.

2. Confirm

that

extensions

3. If a dialing

dialing

can be done

from

all the

that dialing

following

extensions

Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension

using a tone telephone.

can not be done, the polarity

6. Confirm

between

the extension and the KX-T123211 must be reversed.

7. If dialing

can be done on the


using a tone telephone.

jack
jack
jack
jack
jack
jack

number
number
number
number
number
number

l--CO1
%-CO2
g--CO5
lo--CO6
17--CO9
18--CO10

can not be done, the polarity

the KX-T123211

KX-Tl23211

of
of
of
of
of
of

between

and the Central Office Line must

be reversed.
KX-Tl23211

Extension
Central

Office

Line

Reverse
4. Set the Power Switch

on the KX-T123211

6. If any extension

OFF position.

these procedures
5. Connect

here

to the
is changed

or replaced,

(from step 1 through

repeat

step 7).

all Central Office (CO) Lines.

2-11

Serial Printer

Make cables so that the printer may be connected


to the KX-Tl23211
Cables

as shown in the chart.

must be shielded

and the maximum

Serial Interface
( RS-232C )

length

is 6.5 feet.

Connection Chart :
When using special
KX-T123211

user should

Circuit

Signal
Name

Pin
No.

BA

FG
TXD

l-l
2

BB

RXD

Type
(EIA)

Circuit

Pin
No.

Signal
-Name

FG
RXD

AA
BB

TXD

BA

DTR

CD

manual

llg

KX-D491 OD, KX-D4911,

Terminal,
Transmit

KX-D4920,

this unit to a Panasonic

the Communication

KX-D4985,

device

Instructions

the

pursuant

The pin configuration


as follows.

limits

for a Class

to Subpart

J of Part 15

of EIA (RS-232C) connector

Circuit Type

Pin
Number

Signal Name
EIA 1 CCITT
FG
TXD

Frame Ground
Transmitted
Data

AA
BA

101
103

RXD
RTS

Received ,Data
Request To
Send

BB
CA

104
105

CTS
DSR

Clear To Send
Data Set Ready

CB
cc

106
107

SG

Signal Ground
Data Carrier
Detect

AB
CF

Data Terminal
Ready

CD

etc.

Parameter

7
8

must

DCC

be set to the YES position.


details,

with

in this installation

of FCC Rules.

Data

XON / XOFF on the Data Terminal

For further

such as cable, the

use those specified

to comply

computing

Panasonic data terminal ;

If you connect

accessories

Printer RS-232C

RS-232C

20

see the Operating

of the Data Terminal.

2-12

DTR

108.2

is

EIA (RS-232C)

Data Set Ready(DSR);.......................(input)


An On condition of circuit DSR indicates the
printer is ready. Circuit DSR ON does not indicate
that communication
has been established with
the printer.

SIGNALS:

Frame Ground (FG);


Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground
conductor of the AC power cord.
Transmitted
Data (TXD); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..@Jtpuq
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer. A
Mark condition is held unless data or BREAK
signals are being transmitted.
Received

Conveys

Data

(R)(D);.

. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Signal Ground (SG);


Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all
interface signal.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)...............(output)
This signal line is turned ON by the unit to indicate
that it is ON LINE. Circuit DTR ON does not
indicate that communication
has been
established with the printer. It is switched OFF
when the unit is OFF LINE.

.(input)

signals from the printer.

Request To Send (RTS); . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .((-Jutput)


This lead is held ON whenever DSR is ON.

Clear To Send (CTS);.....................


An ON condition of circuit CTS indicates
printer is ready to receive data from the
unit dose not attempt to transfer data or
data when circuit CTS is OFF.

**(input)
that the
unit. The
receive

Data Carrier Detect (DCD)..................(input)


The ON condition is an indication to data terminal
(DTE) that the carrier signal is being received.

1. If the Panasonic printer which is used has a (KX-PI 1 D or KX-P17)


KX-T123211 , set the communication
parameters below.

board and is connected

KX-Pl 1D

to the

KX-P17

KX-T123211
DIP switch
Word length
Parity

Baud Rate

Protocol

Setting

DIP switch

Seth ng

SWl-1

ON

SWl-4

ON

Program to EVEN
(See page 3-32)

SWl-2
SWl-3

ON
ON

SWl-5
SWl-6

OFF
OFF

12008 (default)

SWl-5
SWl-6
SWl-7
SWl-8

ON
OFF
OFF
OFF

SWl-1
SWl-2
SWl-3

OFF
OFF
ON

XON / XOFF mode


only

SW2-8

OFF

SWl-8

ON

7 bit (default)

2. If the Panasonic data terminal is a KX-D4985 or KX-D4920 and is connected to the KX-T123211, the default value
of communication parameter is the same a.s that of the KX-T123211.
If the KX-D491 OD is connected to the KX-T123211, set the baud rate of the KX-D491 OD to 1200 baud, the other
default value is the same as that of the KX-Tl23211.

2-l 3

Paging jack 1

Use an RCA connector.


l

Speaker
/

impedance:

6OOfl

\
Amplifier

CL
0

Output

Useshielded

cable.

Paging equipment

Speaker
/

\
Amplifier

Paging equipment

Use a twoconductor plug


(9/64 inch in diameter)
l Input impedance

0 Input Level
-1OdBm

External

Music Source

Adjust the sound level


of the music on hold
with the Volume
control.

1 1.
EXT MUSIC Jack

2-14

OPTION

The optional cards are following.


Model No.
Expansion Cards

Description

Reference Page

KX-T123270

This card adds 8 Extensions.

2-26

KX-Tl23271

This card adds 4 Extensions.

2-26

KX-T123280

This card adds 4 COs.

KX-T123281

This card adds 2 COs.

DSS Console Card

KX-T123241

The DSS Console requires the DSS


Console Card for the operation.

Off Premise Extension


(OPX) Card

KX-T123285

Enables a standard telephone


installed outside the premise to work
as well as an extension.

2-30

Enables to access system from


outside of system as well.

2-31

2-27, 2-28

2-27
-

Off Premise Extension


(OPX) Unit
Direct Inward System
Access (DISA) Cards

2-29

KX-T123286

KX-T123291

Outgoing Message Card


KX-T123292

In case access from outside by


installed this card, enable to send
the recorded message instead of
dial tone.

Diagnostic Card

KX-Tl23295

Diagnosis

MODEM Card

KX-T123296

This card is necessary for data


communication with remote.

2-15

of system can be done

2-31

2-32

2-32

OPTION

(cont.)

4 CO Lines (initial)

L 2, 4 or 6 CO Lines can be added.

n The following

optional cards are necessary.

l To add the 2 CO Lines

---.*-

Expansion

card KX-Tl23281

l To add the 4 CO Lines

------

Expansion

card KX-Tl23280

l To add the 6 CO Lines

--*---

Expansion

card KX-T123280

16 extensions

(initial)

L 4, 8, 12 or 16 extensions

n The following

(2 cards)

can be added.

optional cards are necessary.

l To add the 4 extensions

----=

Expansion

0 To add the 8 extensions

-----

Expansion

card KX-T123270

-.--

Expansion

card KX-Tl23271

I: Expansion

card KX-Tl23270

0 To add the 12 extensions

0 To add the 16 extensions

- - =-

Expansion

card KX-T123271

card KX-T123270

2- 16

(2 cards)

The DSS console (KX-T123240


proper operation,

or KX-T61640)

needs a paired telephone

(EMSS Proprietary

Telephone)

The DSS console let you dial to the extension

by simply pushing the DSS Button.

The programmable feature buttons on the DSS console let you access various features of the KX-T123211
speed dialing using the CO line in addition to the numbers programmed into the KX-T12321 ls memory.
An EMSS Proprietary Telephone (such as KX-T123220,
as the paired telephone for dialing, storing, etc.
n The following

for

because the DSS console cannot work by itself.

optional

KX-T123230,

KX-T123235,

KX-T123250)

DSS Console and card are necessary.

l DSS Console

KX-T123240

l DSS Console

KX-T61640

(32 DSSs, 16 Feature buttons)


(16 DSSs, 16 Feature buttons)

0 DSS Console Card KX-T123241

Paired Telephone

DSS Console

(EMSS Proprietary
Telephone)

KX-T123240
KX-T61640
Pair

When using the KX-T123240 or KX-T61640, programing must be done. Refer to


Paired Telephone Assignment for DSS Console page 3-l 0.

2-17

and

is required

OPTION

(cont.)

This feature enables access system from outside.


For example,
directly

you can call the desired extension

directly

by dialing the extension

by dialing the number 9 or trunk group access number, following

KX-T123211

Telephone

n The following

optional

number and the desired

CO line

the regular CO number.

Line

card is necessary.

0 Direct Inward System Access Card KX-T123291.


n When execute
l MODEM

n If outgoing

a remote administration,

the following

optional

card is necessary

with DISA cards.

Card KX-T123296

message is necessary

when receive a call from CO line, the following

optional card is necessary

with

DISA cards.
0 Outgoing
n Programing

Message Card KX-T123292


must be done to use this feature.

Refer to CO Mode (Normal / Direct In Line / Direct Inward System Access) Assignment
Direct

Inward System Access

(DISA) on page 3-42.

n A rotary phone will not function.

2-18

on page 3-67 and

Operation

q When disconnect
to CO calling.

CO line after finish CO

From outside of System


Dial tone (First dial tone) will be
heard.
0 If the Outgoing Message Card is
installed to KX-T123211, outgoing
message will be heard instead of dial
tone. (refer to page 2-21)

Make a call
to the line
which is
beforehand
p-yyFAed

Line on the
3211.
KX-
. To

Dial st

n If Security Type is set to None Security or


Trunk Security.

Hang up

Dial remote
security code
(70000 through 79999)

Dial extension number


(100 through 199)

n If Security Type is set to All Security.


@J...
.
.. ....

Data Terminal
follows.

; Welcome to KX-TI 23211

equipment

display as
0

remote administration
ver 2.0 Panasonic CO., LTD

You will hear


second dial
tone

Dial user
security code
(60000 through
69999)

Dial I*

To access the System


(Remote Administration)

call to Extension

You will hear


first or
second dial
tone

Dial extension
number (100
through 199)

;**

Jan.1.1988

12

: 00 AM **

; The HLP displays command informations

. To call to CO line
; > E1

n If Security Type is set to None Security.

Please refer to the manual EVVREMOTE


PROGRAMMING
NANUAL.
Dial 8

Dial trunk
roup number
91 through 8)

You will hear


CO dial tone

Note 0 Dial Security Code or Extension number


or CO line access number in 10 seconds
after outgoing message is finished or first,
second dial tone are heard.
0 If Outgoing Message Card is installed and
outgoing message is not recorded, Direct
Inward System Access (DISA) doesnt
work.
When operator is registered in System,
call to operator automatically and When
operator is not registered in System, call
to general Extension.
When dial the wrong security code 3
times, the call is disconnected.
It is necessary for security code to be
programmed beforehand.
DISA can receive up to 2 calls and cant
receive more than 3 calls at the same time.

D$&ne

You may-dial automatic line access


number 9 instead of 8 and trunk
group number.

n If Security Type is set to Trunk Security


or All Security.

Dial user

Dial 8

tEzrity
(60000 through
69999)

Dial trunk
You will hear
CO dial tone
group
number
(1 through 8)

Dial phone
number

l You may dial automatic line access


number 9 instead of 8 and trunk
group number.
2-

19

OPTION

(cont.)

Retry Function

Time Over of Receiving Call

When press the * button while hearing a ringback


tone, reorder tone, busy tone or talking over the
telephone, back to the situation of dial tone and you
can call again, but you cant retry while calling CO
line to extension with DISA.

When time over of receiving


follows.
When outgoing

Example
When Outgoing

message

is registered.

Dial to KX-T123211

with DISA.

Message Card is not installed


Outgoing

(If Security Type is set to None Security or Trunk


Security.)
Dial to KX-Ti 23211 with DISA.
&
.

call, the call moves as

First dial tone will be heard.

w-

message will be heard

(If you dont dial in 10 secinds after outgoing


message is finished. or dial the wrong number.)
I

~
+

Dial to extension.
+
When dial the wrong number or call another

(When operator

is registered

in System)

4
Call the Operator
+ (When operator

is not registered

in System)

(If Security Type is set to All Security.)


I;*1

Dial to KX-T123211

with DISA.

First dial t;;z;;

be heard.

If the a

button is not pressed in 10 seconds,

the call will be disconnected.


Dial the User Security

If the 18/ button is pressed in 10 seconds,

Code (60000 through

First

dial tone will be heard and you can enter.

l-4
I I

Second dial tone will be heard.

II

II
When Outgoing

Message Card is not installed.

Dial to extension.

When dial the wrong number or call another

(If you dont dial in 10 seconds)

button in case of as follows,


n If press the
the call will be disconnected.
0 While outgoing message is heard.
0 While dial tone (1st or 2nd) is heard.
0 While Silence after outgoing message is
finished.
n When Outgoing Message Card is installed and
outgoing message is not recorded, the call
which is sent to DISA CO is sent to general
extension.

q1

If the

button is not pressed in 10 seconds,

the call will be disconnected.


If the m button is pressed in 10 seconds,
dial tone will be heard.
2 - 20

First

To extend the call duration time


while calling CO line

Security Code

Security Code is used to protect from abusing


l If you call to any outside line using DISA, the KXT123211

will disconnect

after 10 minutes.

system with DISA.

the call from the line

For changing

There are User Security Code and.Remote

the time, see CO

Security

Code in Security Code.

to CO Duration Time Limit on page 3-30.


User Securitv Code

3 beeps tone will be heard every 5 seconds for 15


seconds before the call is disconnected
.

line.

If you press button except the

from the

User Security Code is used when dial to extension


or CO line with DISA.

button in 15

seconds, the call duration time can be extended

n Security code can be set by 3 modes as follows.


5

None Security
This is the mode in which Security Code is
unnecessary when dialing both extension and
outside line.

minutes.
1 beep tone will be heard when button except the

is accepted.

Direct

For changing

the time, see

Inward System Access on page 3-42.

Trunk Security
This is the mode in which Security Code is
necessary when dialing an outside line, but
unnecessary when dialing an extension.

Outgoing Message
Enable to send outgoing

message to the telephone

All Security
This is the mode in which Security Code is
necessary when dialing both extension and
outside line.

called with DISA.


Refere to page 4-66 as to the registration
outgoing

of

message.

w User Security Code can be set by 4 types.


Example
This is ABC company.

0 User Security Code 1:60000

Would you dial to your

0 User Security Code 4:60000

desired post? Operator number is 00, Business


is 100 and Accounts

department

-II

is 180.

Remote Security Code

Operator

Remote Security Code is used when Remote


Administration is done with DISA.

lf operator is registered in System Program and


outgoing

message

sent to operator

has been recorded,

n Remote Security Code can be set by 1 type.

the call is

0 Remote Security code:70006

automatically.

-II

0 When time out


0 When the called extension

doesnt answer in

enable to enter last 4


digits with program
mode

LIST OF TONES

20 seconds.
0 When the called extension

enable to enter last 4


digits with program
mode

IseC
I-;

is set to Do Not

1st dial tone

Disturb.

II

2nd dial tone


Reorder tone
Busy tone
Ringback tone
Disconnect
warning tone
Prolong
confirmation
2 - 21

tone

:
I
II
1 l-l 1

OPTION

Enables

a standard

telephone

installed

(cont.)

outside the premise to work as an extension

through

public or private

rate

lines (under 6 miles).

KX-T123286
I

Standard Telephone
Jack number 32

Jack number 31

KX-Tl23211

n The following

optional

card and unit are necessary.

l Off Premise Extension

(OPX) Card KX-T123285

l Off Premise Extension

(OPX) Unit KX-T123286

n Programing

is necessary

0 OPX cant function with Doorphone.


l The Ring Tone from extension

or CO line are as follows.

to use this feature.

Refer to Off Premise Extension on page 3-45.

The doorphone

can be installed to the KX-Tl23211.

Doorphone

n The following

optional doorphone

and adaptor are necessary.

0 Doorphone

KX-T30865

0 Doorphone

adaptor KX-T30860D

(only)

2 - 22

Doorphone

By using data terminal connected to RS-232C on KX-Tl23211


or remote data terminal connected
through MODEM, diagnosis of KX-T123211 system can be done.

Remote Administration

Telephone

Data terminal equipment

n The following

0 Diagnostic

Line

KX-T123211

optional cards are necessary.


Card KX-T123295

0 Direct Inward System Access Cards KX-T123291


l MODEM

Card KX-T123296

On-Site Administration

Data terminal equipment

w The following
0 Diagnostic

KX-T123211

card is necessary.
Card KX-1123295

2 - 23

to KX-T123211

OPTION

(cont.)

KX-T12321 ls diagnostic feature has two command systems.


One is a Test commands system which actually executes the diagnostic process, and the
other is a Control commands system which controls the state of diagnosis.
6. DISA module and OGM card test

1. All components test


The system consecutively
following description.

executes

The KX-T123211 system allovys you to test the


DISA-A card which controls all the DISA system,
the DISA-B card which consists of crosspoint
switches etc. and the OGM card which consists
of voice processors etc.

test items as

2. CPU card and system control circuit test


The system executes the test of i/o circuit, real
time clock chip on the CPU card and i/o circuit on
each card.
This is the basic test on the KX-T123211
system.
You should execute this test at first, because, if
i/o circuits have defects, the following test items
will be meaningless.

7. OPX interface card and unit box test


Off premise extension (OPX) test allows you to
check the OPX interface card which consists of
the bi-directional amplifiers and analogue
switches, and the OPX unit box which consists of
hook detectors, ring trip circuits, loop current
sources, ringing generators and so on.

3. Cross point card test

6. MODEM card test

The system executes the test of DTMF generator


and receivers at first, and executes the test of the
cross point switch circuits.

This test allows you to check the digital and


analogue circuits on the MODEM chip with 300
bps and 1200 bps communication speed.
You can use this test on the on-site diagnostic
mode only.

4. CO card test
This test allows you to check of relays, analogue
switches, bell detection circuits CPCLOOP current
detection circuits and bidirectional amplifiers on
the CO card no. 1 through no. 3.

5. Line circuit (LC) card test


The system executes the test of loop current
sources, ringing relays, hook detection circuits
and ring trip circuits on each LC card.
And it will execute the check of data
communication capability on the LC cards and
DSS console interface card.

2 - 24

Card Installation

1. To protect the printed circuit board from static


electricity, first discharge any body static by
touching the metal board.

0 Insert the optional card with holding a levers of


the card into the KX-T123211 surely.
Do not touch parts on the card.

2. Loosen the screws to remove the metal board.

metal board

3. The location of the optional cards for the


KX-Tl23211
is shown in the following.

v
Screws

(KX-T123292)
$1
l!h

_ --__

I \\

\\

I I

2 - 25

//

(KX-T123241)

OPTION

To add eight extensions

(cont.)

(jack number 17 through

24), use the optional

expansion

card

KX-T123270.
To add four extensions

(jack number 17 through

20), use the optional

expansion

card

KX-T123271.
1. Insert the expansion
KX-Tl23271

2. Insert connector
KX-T123271

card KX-Tl23270

or

into the KX-Tl23211


to the KX-T123270

as shown

Cable Pin Numbers

or

at right.

to be connected

See page 2-10.


0 Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211
to operate improperly.
See During Installation page 6-l and
During Connection page 6-2 before
connecting.
To Extensions
or 17 through

(jack number

17 through

20,

w=

24 )
Expansion/card
KX-T123270
KX-T123271

To add eight extensions


32), use the optional

. . jack number
. . . jack number

17 through
17 through

24
20

25 through
25 through

32
28

(jack number 25 through


expansion

card

KX-T123270.
To add four extensions
28), use the optional

(jack number 25 through


expansion

card

KX-T123271.
1. Insert the expansion

card KX-T123270

or

KX-T123271 into the KX-T123211.


2. Insert connectorto
KX-T123271

the KX-T123270

as shown

Cable Pin Numbers

or

at right.

to be connected

See page 2-10.


0

Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211 to


operate improperly.
See During Installation page 6-1 and
During Connection page 6-2 before
connecting.
To Extensions
or 25 through

(jack number 25 through

28,

32 )
Expansion

card

KX-T123270
KX-T123271
2-26

. . . jack number
. . . jack number

To add four Central


through

Office

Lines (CO 9

12), use the optional

expansion

card KX-Tl23280.

R : Ring
T :Tip

1. Insert the expansion

card KX-T123280

into

the KX-Tl23211.

Vi

2. Insert the modular

plug of the telephone

line cord (2-conductor


.

ack (CO)

wiring)

into the

modular jack on the KX-T123280.


0 Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211
to operate improperly.
See During Installation page 6-l and
During Connection page 6-2 before
connecting.
-

To Terminal

Board or Modular

)rn the Central

Office (CO).

To add two Central


COlO),

Jacks

Office

use the optional

lines (CO9 and

expansion

card
T : Tip

card KX-T123281

into the KX-T123211.


View of TEL Jack (CO)
2. Insert the modular
line

cord

plug of the telephone

(2-conductor

wiring)

into the

\\

modular jack on the KX-T123281.


0 Mis-connection may cause the KX-Tl23211
to operate improperly.
See During Installation
page 6-l and
During Connection page 6-2 before
connecting.

To Terminal

Board or Modular

from the Central

Office (CO).

b
co9

R :Ring

KX-Tl23281.
1. Insert the expansion

s
P

Use 2-conductor wiring cord

Jacks
Use 2-conductor wiring cord
2-27

co10

OPTION

(cont.)

When you remove the card,


pull upward.
To add four Central Office lines (CO5 through 8),
use the optional expansion card KX-T123280.

Insert the expansion


the KX-T123211.

card KX-T123280

into

Insert the modular plug of the telephone


line cord (2-conductor
wiring) into the
modular jack on the KX-T123280.
Mis-connection may cause the KX-T123211
to operate improperly.
See During Installation page 6-l and
During Connection page 6-2 before
connecting.

co5
R : Ring

CO6

T : Tip

co7
CO8

View of TEL Jack (CO)

To Terminal

Board or Modular

from the Central

Office

(CO).

Jacks

@
Use 2-conductor wiring cord

2-28

To connect the optional


is required.
The DSS Console
proper operation,

DSS Console

(KX-T123240
because

for dialing,

Place the KX-T123240

or KX-T61640)

the DSS console

The EMSS Proprietary Telephone


the paired telephone

(KX-T123240

storing,

the optional

needs a paired Telephone

cannot

DSS Console

(EMSS

card (KX-T123241)

Proprietary

Telephone)

for

work by itself.

(such as KX-T123220,

or KX-T61640

1. Insert the DSS Console

or KX-T61640),

KX-T123230,

KX-T123235,

KX-T123250)

is required as

etc.

and the paired telephone

card (KX-Tl23241)

into the

side by side on your desk.

DSS Console

Ca{d KX-T123241

KX-Tl23211
2. Insert the modular
(4-conductor

wiring)

plug of the console

line cord

into the modular jack on the

KX-T123241.
DSS is written on the Card.

Dl : Data 1

D2 : Data 2
-

s
P

View of TEL Jack

Notes:
Up to 2 KX-T123240s
to the KX-T123211.

or KX-T61640s

Console

Console

htp

can be connected

Each console requires its own

paired telephone.
KX-Tl23240

or KX-T61640

pair with a standard

can not be connected

wiring

is

6,q;i;:;f;l;he

=7----l

in

telephone.

The max. length of the console

line cord (twisted

cable) that connects the KX-T123211


Console

4conductor

with the DSS

is shown below.

Pair Telephone

DSS Console

(EMSS Proprietary
Telephone)

26 AWG: Under 460 feet


24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

KX-T123240
KX-T61640

. Pair
When using the KX-T123240
must be done. Refer to Paired
for DSS Console
2-29

page 3-10.

or KX-T61640,
Telephone

program

Assignment

OPTION

Enables a standard telephone


To avail of this feature,

(cont.)

installed outside the premise to work as an extension

an optional

Off Premise Extension

Unit KX-T123286

1. Insert the Off Premise Extension Card


KX-T123285 into the KX-T123211.
2. Insert the connector from the KX-T123286
the Off Premise Extension Card.

through public orprivate

is necessary

Extension

lines.

aside from KX-T123285.

Card
Connector
(24 pin)

to

\
3. Insert the modular plug of the Standard
Telephone Line (2conductor
wiring) into the
modular jack on the KX-T123286.
4. Connect the frame of the KX-T123286 to
earth ground properly to protect the unit.
5. Plug in the AC Power cord from the
KX-T123286.
6. Turn on the Power Switch on the
KX-T123286.
l The Power
indicator will be lit.
Power Switch

Off Premise Extension


KX-T123286

OPX is written

on the Card.

Standard Telephone

Unit +

Jack number 32

Jack number 31

To earth
ground
L

Use 2-conductor

wiring cord

.
n Programing must be done to use this feature.

Refer to Off Premise

Extension

on page 3-45.

W Primary Power Fuse, (800 mA, 250 V) xl:


If the Power Indicator light goes off, the Primary Power
Fuse must be replaced after remove the cause.

2 - 30

This feature enables to access System from outside of System and then call to extension or outside line.
For example, you can call the desired extension directly by dialing the extension number following the regular CO
number.
Optional KX-T123292 card is necessary to program KX-T123211 to send Outgoing Message when called with this
feature.
1.

Insert the Direct Inward System Access


and B into the KX-T123211.

Cards A

Direct Inward System Access Cards KX-T 123291

DISA-B Card

DISA-A and DISA-B


on each Card.

An Outgoing Message
Access feature.
1.

are written

can be sent from the KX-T123211

when a call is received

Outg
Card

Insert the Outgoing Message Card KX-T123292


into the KX-Tl23211.

OGM is written on the Card.


For how to record OUtgOing

Message,

DISA-A Card

refer to Outgoing

Message on page 4-67.


2 - 31

using the Direct

Inward System

OPTION

(cont.)

By using the data terminal connected to RS-232C on KX-T123211


through MODEM, diagnosis of KX-Tl23211
system can be done.

or remote data terminal

connected

to KX-Tl23211

Remote administration

Data terminal equipment

The following optional cards are necessary.


0 Diagnostic Card KX-T123295
0 Direct Inward System Access Cards
KX-T123291
(See page 2-31)
0 MODEM Card KX-T123296
(See page 2-32)

The following card is necessary.


0 Diagnostic Card KX-Tl23295

KX-Tl23211

On-site administration
RS232C Cable

Data terminal equipment


1. Insert the Diagnostic
KX-T123211.

KX-T123211
Card KX-T123295

into the

jgfxp!g

DIAGis

written on the Card.

This card is necessary for data communication to execute confirmation


the System using remote data terminal equipment.
1.

Insert the MODEM


KX-T123211.

Card KX-T123296

or registration

into the

MODEM Card
KX-T123296

MODEM

of System data or diagnosis of

is written on the Card.


2 - 32

For installing

the doorphone,

Installation

use the Optional

Doorphone

Adaptor

of the doorphone

(Use the KX-T30860D

only).

Installqtion of the Doorphone Adaptor

Loosen the screw to


separate the
doorphone into 2
halves.

How to install
KX-Tl23211.

the Doorphone

Adaptor

into the

1. Connect

a 4-conductor
modular connector
the doorphone adaptor.

Install the lower case


to the wall with 2
screws.

doorphone

adaptor

to

(KX-T30860D)

4-conductor

wiring

l 2 kinds of screws

are included. Please


choose according to
your wall type. See
the followings.

w-------When

been fixed to the wall.


you wish to install the
doorphone directly to the wall.

2. Install the doorphone adaptor


adaptor compartment.

into the

3. Connect the wires


from the terminal
box to the screws
located in the
upper case.
to the terminal box
(See page 2-34)
4. Secure both halves together
screw.

and ,re-install the

3. After drawing a CPU Card, insert the adaptor


connector into connector on the CPU Card
(circuit board).

Adaptor

Connector

2-33

CPU Card

Connector

OPTION

(cont.)

Doorphone Wiring
(4 Connect
(W Connect
(C) Connect

the doorphone

adaptor

to the terminal

box using a 4-conductor

the wires of doorphone

1 to the red and green screws

the wires of doorphone

2 to the yellow

modular

of the terminal

connector.

box.

and black screws of the terminal

box.

:or
.\

Doorphone

Doorp hone 1 (KX-T30865)


YELLOW
RED

2 (KX- ,T30865)

BLACK
GREEN

The max. length of the telephone line cord (twisted cable) that connects the KX-T123211 and the doorphone
(KX-T30865)

is shown below.

26 AWG: Under 230 feet


24 AWG: Under 370 feet

Automobile type batteries which customer supplied is available


to operate all the features in the event of power failure.

as a backup power supply of the FX-T123211

For connecting automobile type batteries, use the Optional Battery Adaptor KX-A26.
1. Connect the Battery Adaptor KX-A26 to automobile type batteries.
2. Connect the Battery Adaptor KX-A26 to the Battery Backup Connector of the Kx-TI 23211.

KX-T123211

0 Consisting

of two 12 VDC (24 VDC)

PROGRAMMING
To activate

this system, the requirements

the Power Switch

1.

At extension

to jack number 01: All system

changes(example

toll restriction,
done through

company

and the customer

must be programmed

: system clear,

system speed dialing


extension

entry-..) are

connected

to jack

number 01.

4. Press the MEMORY

button to clear system.

5. To return to the initial program

parameters are preset as the default

data.
connected

to jack number

01 must

System parameters
CO parameters
Extension

parameters

DSS parameters
Speed dial
2.

System Program Switch setting:


The System Program Switch located
KX-T123211
(Proprietary

on the

must be set to the PITS


Integrated

Telephone

System)

position while making program change.


all programming
the program

3.

changes

return

switch to the SET position.

Overlay:
This overlay

is used for programming

system and the program


inscribed

4.

After

are completed,

function

the

names are

on this card. Refer to page 3-2.

Before system programming,

operate the

system clear to set to the default data of the


program.

See page 3-78.

System Clear:
Set the System Program Switch of the
KX-T123211 to the PITS position.

1. Dial (99).
System Clear will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
3. Repeat pressing
Menu:

the SELECT button until the

All Para is displayed.

mode, press the

END button.
0 The following

0 Extension

once

has been turned on.

connected

programming

from telephone

When the System Program Switch on the KX-T123211 is set to the PITS position, the function of the
KX-T123230 or KX-T123235 connected to jack number 01 will change as follows.

CLEAR button
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE button

+
+

button7
button

LIQUID CRYSTAL
Display (LCD)

r-

Overlay
\

KX-T123230

FLASH button

ZiSEEFIy)

END button

3-2

or KX-T 123235

button

1. Turn the Power Switch

ON.

2. Set the System Program Switch to PITS position.


The LCD on the KX-T123230 or KX-T123235 will show SYS-PGM
l

Be sure the handset

of the extension

connected

01 is in the cradle and the speakerphone


3. To program

automatic

number 987-654-3210

NO ?&I.

to jack number

button is off.

line access number 9 and the phone


into speed access code 00. (Refer to

page 3-5.)
KX-T123230 or KX-T123235 at extension connected to
jack number 01.
(Extension connected to jack number 01 must be a
KX-T123230 or KX-T123235.1

Dial (01) or press the


AUTO button.

1.

2.
3.

Display
Speed Dialing
m;

Press the NEXT button.


Dial (00) or press the

KX-T123211

If nothing

is stored in

access code OO,

NEXT button.

11
o If already
automatic

stored the
line access

number 9 and the phone


number

123-456-7890,

1oo:9-123-456_7891
4.

0 Dial 9.
If you make a mistake while programming,

0 Press - button.
@ Dial 987.
@ Press - button.

1oo:-987-654_32101

1. Press the END button.

@ Dial 654.
2. Start programming

@ Press - button.
@ Dial 3210.
5.

Press the MEMORY


button.

6.

procedure

from the

beginning.

(oo:-987-654-32101
l

MEMORY

To program the next access code, press the NEXT


button.
l To program a desired access code, press the SELECT
button and dial speed access code.

7.

Repeat steps 4 to 6.

8.

To return to the initial


program mode, press the
END button.

You will hear a beep after pressing

the

button.

The MEMORY

indicator

when the MEMORY


and then the Indicator

light will go on

button is pressed,
light will go out

when the NEXT or PREV button &pressed.


ISYS_PGMl

4. Return the System Program Switch to SET position.


l

To make program

change,

start from the beginning.

?_a

System Feature

r..............................................................

enterthe

with

year

1811813
988

2digits.

year

,......-.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired

month is

displayed
i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . enter

the day

.I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._ until the

with

desired

1 or 2 digits

day

of the

week is displayed
;
:
:
:
:
::
:
:

enter the hour with 1 or 2 digits

:..- enter the minutes with 2 digits


:
:
i :- until the desired AM/PM is
: :
: ; displayed
:. :
: ;. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._
;
. .. . ... ._

Description

7. Press the m

Entry of the current

button. 12:OO AM will be

displayed.

day, date and time.

8. Enter the hour with 1 or 2 digits.

Programming

9. Press the m

minute with 2 digits.

1. Dial(OO).

Day/Time

Set will be displayed.

10. Press the m


pressing

2. Press the NEXT button.

AM/PM

88 Jan.1 FRI will be displayed and 88


will blink.

the SELECT button until the desired


is displayed.
button.

12. To return to the initial program

button.

mode, press

the END button.

4. Press the m

button and then repeat

the SELECT button until the desired

Condition

month is displayed.
5. Press the a

button and then enter the day

If m

button ispressed,

return to the previous

with 1 or 2 digits.

programming
6. Press the m
pressing

button and then repeat

11. Press the MEMORY

3. Enter the year (last 2 digits) using the dialing

pressing

button and then enter the

the display

sequence

will

in the

step.

button and then repeat

the SELECT

button until the desired

Instantly

after pressing

the MEMORY

button,

the. new time will start.

day of the week is displayed.

However,

the LCD of extension

jack number 01 will display


SET.

to

the new time only

after the System Program Switch


3-4

connected

is set to

AB=[r)(Ol

: speed access code 00

piE[

: speed access code 99

. ..

CD=
:

or

.. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

until the desired

;-----..-

filfijI(NEXT~l~hone

pj
MFi

: access number of Trunk Group1

dm

: access number of Trunk Group8

speed access code (00 through 99) appears

4. Enter automatic line access number or trunk


group number.
See page 4-2, regarding automatic selection.

Description
phone numbers can be stored with

each number capable of storing 32 digits and


may be accessed

See page 3-52 and 4-3, regarding trunk group.

from any extension.

Pushing the *I, I# PAUSE,

9
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88

-I,

FLASH or ICM (Secret) button counts as 1


digit.
Refer to Speed

Dialing on page 4-3.

Programming
1. Dial (01) or press the AUTO button.
Speed

Dialing will be displayed.

will be displayed.

NO?-

3. Dial (00 through

99) or press the NEXT

When dialing

(00) or pressing

the NEXT

button.
l The LCD will show 0O:Not Stored when

nothing

automatic line access number


access number of trunk group
access number of trunk group
access number of trunk group
access number of trunk group
access number of trunk group
access number of trunk group
access number of trunk group
access number of trunk group

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

in a phone

number.

To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR


button.
z
When you dont want to display the dialed phone
b
number, press the ICM (SECRET) button before
and after dialing the phone number. Do not press
:
the ICM button before line access number (9 or 81
through 88) and account code.

button, for speed access code entry.


Example :

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

5. Enter the phone number.


You may enter punctuations

2. Press the NEXT button.


Speed

line access number

number I~MEMORY lm
I

100 system

: automatic

is stored in speed access code

00. When the automatic

Example:

line access

number 9 and the phone number

g-123- w

123 - 456 - 7890 are stored,

press the KM button

The display shows as follows when programming.


01 : 9-123 [456]

00: 9- 123- 456- 789 will be displayed.

The display shows as follows when dialing.


-123...

3-5

Conditions
6. Press the MEMORY button.
o The memory indicator will be lit.

Use the e,

or G

button for scrolling

the display.

7. l To advance to the next speed access code,


press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous speed access
code, press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired speed access code,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
speed access code.

Automatic

8. Repeat steps 4 to 7, to program the other


phone numbers.

88) has been dialing.

9. To return to the initial program


the END button.

Example :

line access number 9 or trunk

group access number (81 through

88)

must be stored.
When dialing,

the pause is automatically

entered after automatic

line access number 9

or trunk group access number (81 through

Continuous

mode, press

use of speed dialing

is possible.

In this case, speed access code 02 should

To change

Repeat steps 1 to 9.

not include

the automatic

line access number

or trunk group access number.


To erase after programming

When dialing, the dialed number will be displayed


on the LCD of the KX-T123230

1. Dial (01) or press the AUTO

Speed

button.
Dialing will be displayed.

KX-T61631 / KX-T61630 / KX-T30830.


The limit of the LCD is 16 characters

2. Press the NEXT button.


Speed NO ? + will be displayed.

will scroll all numbers


To erase all entries,

3. Dial (00 through 99 ) or press the NEXT


button, for speed access code entry.
The speed access code and the phone
number will be displayed.

stored.
refer to System

Data

There is a blank phone number directory


page 7-l.

button.

6. l To advance to the next speed access code,


press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous speed access
code, press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired speed access code,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
speed access code.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to erase the programmed
other phone number.
8. To return to the initial program
the END button.

but

Clear on page 3-78.

4. Press the CLEAR button,


5. Press the MEMORY

I KX-T123235 /

mode, press

3-6

on

Examples

1) To enter trunk group access number 81 and telephone

(01 NEXT 09 8.1 201-392-4669


: :

MEMORY

number 201-392-4.669

into speed access codeb0.

END_)

Telephone
number

Speed access:
code

Trunkgroup
access number
l If punctuation

is not entered

( 00 : 812013924869
2) To enter automatic

in a phone number, the LCD will show as below

line access number 9, account

code 1234 and telephone

number 201-392-4669

into

speed access code 02.


(01
--_ NEXT02

9: 3c .x- 1234201-392-4669

:
Telephone

:
Speed access;
code

account

MEMORY

l Refer to Account

END)

code Input mode page

3-71 and Account code Dane


. _ 4-40.
number

code

automatic line
access number
3) To access MCI
(01 NEXT
zEi:d

$l

9 123-4567

acceSS :

PAUSE

MCI number

(01 NEXT
zl;;d

9876
Security
code

02

access

81 765-4321

PAUSE
--

Trunk group access

When required

to change

PAUSE

END)

6789 MEMORY

END)

Telephone
number

201-348-7000

; . . .._...... .
i
PAUSE button

Telephone
number

02

81

S$$tY

number

the dialing

mode from the pulse mode to the tone mode. (See page 4-49)

pulse mode
I+
4
NEXT

MEMORY

ITT

ITT numb.er

(01

201-348-7000

PAUSE button

automatic line
access number

4) To access

PAUSE

_ . . . . ... . . . . .
i

tone mode

765-4321 JC
_T # PAUSE
;

PAUSE

201-348-7000

# button

*button

3-7

6789 MEMORY

END)

:..................,until

the desired

Jack number

,...............................

(01 through 32) appears

CDE=~1~1~~
mmki

: to assign phone number 100


: to assign phone number 199~

i
.

pzjliiEq

default

NEiT
IlCtrEll

MEMORY
I

lpiiq

132

is assigned

to extension

of Jack number

01

is assigned

to extension

of Jack number

32

riiEdsE&m

I............................................

AB=mo[

: to assign to Jack number 01

I*[

: to assign to Jack number 32

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the extension


number on the other jack number.

Description
Enables programming of a 3 digits extension
number (100 through 199) for each extension
phone. This provides the freedom to develop
logical extension numbering system by
department or by building floor as desired.

8. To return to the initial program mode, press


the END button.
l The LCD will show the initial program
mode, SYS-PGM NO ? +.

Conditions
0 The extension

Programming

number that has been already


programmed can not be entered.
In case programmed extension number is the
same as what was previously stored, when the
MEMORY button is pressed, three beeps will
be heard.

1. Dial (02).

Extension No Set will be displayed.


2. Press the NEXT button.
Jack NO ?+ will be displayed.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the Jack
number (01 through 32 ).
Jack 01 : EXTlOl will be displayed and
101 will blink.
4. Dial the extension number
newly ( 100 throug hl99 ).
l When dialing (150) the
Jack 01 : EXT150 will
l To erase a wrong entry,
button.
5. Press the MEMORY

0 When the extension number 125 have been


already assigned to the jack number 25, for
programming to assign the extension number
125 to the jack number 02, after
programming to assign ,the other extension
number (100 through 199) to the jack number
25, program to assign the extension number
125 to the jack number 02.

which is set
LCD will show
be displayed.
press the CLEAR

Programming Table

button.

See page 7-3.

8. l To advance to the next jack number, press


the NEXT button.
0 To return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
0 To go to the desired jack number, press
the SELECT button and then dial the jack
number.
3-8

-..........until

the desired
b

.-..........

operator

number (1 or 2) appears

AB= mr[

: to assign extension

(Jack no. 01) for Operator

use

mk[

: to assign extension

(Jack no. 32) for Operator

use

default

......

Nothing

is stored

Description
Up to 2 of any extensions

can be selected as the

5. Press the MEMORY

operator extensions.

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

00 can be dialed to call operator 1, and 01 can be

6. Repeat steps 3 to 5, to program the jack

dialed to call operator 2. CO Mode (Direct In Line)

number which is set the operator

Assignment (on page 3-57) can be used to program


all incoming calls to be answered by the operator.

7. To return to the initial program

2.

mode, press

the END button.

Conditions
To clear the jack number which is set

Programming

operator,

1. Dial (03).
Operator

Ext will be displayed.

Programming Table

2. Press the NEXT button.


Operate

See page 7-3.

NO?-- will be displayed.

3. Press the NEXT button.


OPT1 : Disable will be displayed and
Disable

press the CLEAR button at step 4.

will blink.

4. Dial the jack number which is set the operator 1.


l When you dial (01)

OPT1 : Jack-01 will be displayed.

3-9

I.........,......

To activate an extension as a paired telephd&$f&

console 1

: extension (Jack number 01)

AB=[rin

nE[

: extension (Jack number 32)

To activate an extension as a paired telephone for console


CD= mm

: extension

(Jack number 01)

m.121: extension (Jack number 02)


lTiE[
04 NEXT
NEXT A6 MEMORY
L7D~Ir~~l3nEl

NEXT

CD

MEMORY

Description

......

default

(Jack number 32)

END

7. Dial the jack number which is paired with


the console 2.

The extension number paired with the DSS


Console (KX-T123240) must be assigned when
the DSS Console is used. The jack number of the
extension phone is programmed to identify the
paired phone. Up to two DSS Consoles can be
used for each 32 extension phones.
When all incoming calls on outside lines are set
(using CO Mode Assignment on page 3-57) t0
ring at the operator extension phone, assigning
the DSS Console to the operator extension will
make the operators job much easier.

8. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.
9. To return to the initial program
the END button.

mode, press

Conditions
0 Up to two DSS consoles can be connected.
l

The
pair
l Two
jack

Programming

DSS console can not be connected in


with a standard telephone.
DSS consoles cant be entered to one
number.

Example :

1. Dial (04)

DSS Assignwill

: extension

If Mr Jays secretary has KX-T123230 at


extension jack number 10 and it is to use the
DSS console (KX-Tl23240),
the console should
be connected to the modular jack!marked MJl)
of the DSS card (KX-T123241).
(Paired extension is jack number 10.)

be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


DSS NO ? + will be displayed.
3. Press the NEXT button.
DSS 1 : Jack - 01 will be displayed
01 will blink.

and

If Mr Browns secretary has KX-T123220 at


extension jack number 20 and it is to use the
DSS console (KX-T123240), the console should
be connected to the modular jack (marked MJ2)
of the DSS card (KX-T123241).
(Paired extension is jack number 20.)

4. Dial the jack number which is paired with


the consolel.
5. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
0 If console 2 is not connected,
step 9.

proceed to

6. Press the NEXT button.


DSS 2 : Jack - 02 will be displayed
02will blink.

and

Programming Table
See page 7-3.
3-10

~..............................11
until the desired

Description
Outside

Programming Table

calls can be transferred

extension

to any

See page 7-3.

manually.

l While an extension

Console

paired with the DSS

having a conversation

with outside

calls, With Transfer mode allows you to


transfer

outside

call by only pressing

the DSS

button of the DSS Console.


e While an extension

paired with the DSS Console

having a. conversation
Transfer

with outside calls, Without

mode allows you to transfer

by pressing

the TRANSFER

outside call

button and then DSS

button of the DSS Console.

Programming
1. Dial (05).

DSS Mode win be displayed.


2. Press the NEXT button.
With Transfer will be displayed
3. Repeat pressing
between

mode appears

and blink.

the SELECT button to alternate

With Transfer and Without

Transfer to select the desired


4. Press the MEMORY

mode.

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.


5. To return to the initial program

mode,

press the END button.


3-11

until the desired mode appears


Man ....... .-Day/Night
service
Auto ......... Day/ Night service

: ..........................

is manually switched ....... default


is automatically
switched

:.

pjc-lmNEXTllSELECTlfi1

Programming

Description
Allows

Day/Night

manually

service

to be selected

1. Dial (06).

or automatically.

Day/Night

In case of manual switching,

2. Press the NEXT button.

Night Service on page 4-38.


In case of automatic
Time (Day/Night
The following

switching,

Service

features

Mode Change

set the Starting

Outward

mode) on page 3-13.

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate

will be switched

between

Dialing Assignment

desired

on

page 3-53.
l Flexible

Ringing

mode.

5. To return to the initial program

l CO Mode (Normal/Direct

In Line/Direct

Assignment

Class Assignment

Inward

Conditions

on page 3-57.

of Toll Restriction

Service

Assignment

of Doorphone

of Service

Mode) is set toAuto,

Day/ Night Service

on page 3-67.
0 Ringing

mode, press

the END button.

When the Switching


l Service

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

Assignment

Ringing Assignment on page 3-56.

System Access)

Man and Auto to select the

4. Press the MEMORY

on page 3-54.
l Delayed

: Man will be displayed

and Man will blink.

Day mode or Night mode.


l Flexible

Mode will be displayed.

refer to Flexible

mode,manual

page 3-76.

the present

mode will not change

you finish programming.To

on

Mode (Day/Night

operation

change
is required.

select the Starting time (Day/Night

After you

Service Mode)

on page 3-l 3, select the present Day/Night


by Flexible

Night Service on page 4-38.

Programming Table
See page 7-4.

3-12

after

the present

mode

r---------Until
1

the desired day of the week appears

. to start at 1 oclock for day service


: to start at 9 oclock for day service

: to start at 12 oclock for day service

mm

i-

,
I

CD=m.m

: to start at 0 rninute........................default

ml-G-l : to start at 59 minutes

I
I

I
- until the desired

l------

r-

1EF=

111

mode appears

: to start at 1 oclock for night service


: to start at 5 oclock for night service.........default

r-i-.

II

to start at 12 oclock for night service

r GHd?-/k]
I1

I
I

I
I

: to start at 0 minute.......,.......

5 9
ntl

: to start at 59 minutes

until the desired


I
I
I
I

I
I

(To advance to the next day of the week)

3-13

default

mode appears

11. Press the MEMORY button.

Description

The LCD will stop blinking.

If you select the automatic switching mode for day/

12. Press the SELECT button.

night service, enter the starting time.


Starting time can be programed for every day of the

Night: 500 PM or Night: None will be

week. Refer to Switching of Service Mode (Day/Night

displayed as the default value and Night will


blink.

Service Mode) on page 3-12.

13. Press the q

button.

5 or None will blink.

Programming

0 If Night: None will be displayed, press the

1. Dial (07).

SELECT button.

Day/Night Time will be displayed.

Night: 500 PM will be displayed.


2. Press the NEXT button.

14. Enter the starting time for night service using 1

Day of The Week will be displayed.

or 2 digits.

3. Press the NEXT button.

0 To set a same mode as last day made, press

Sunday will be displayed.

the SELECT button,and

0 To advance to the next day.

19.

Press the NEXT button.

15. Press the Ia

0 To return to the previous day.

then proceed to step

button.

00 will blink.

Press the PREV button.


18. Enter the minutes using 2 digits.

4. Press the SELECT button.


17. Press the +I

Day: 9:00 AM or Day: None will be

PM will blink.

displayed as the default value and Day will


blink.

18. Press the SELECT button*to alternate between

5. Press the e

AM and PM to select the correct setting.

button.

19. Press the MEMORY button.

9 or None will blink.


l

The LCD will stop blinking.

If Day: None is displayed, press the

20. e To advance to the next day of the week, press

SELECT button.
Day: 9:00 AM will be displayed.

the NEXT button.


0 To return to the previous day of the week,

8. Enter the starting hour for day service using 1

press the PREV button.

or 2 digits.
l

21. Repeat steps 4 to 20 to program the starting

To set a same mode as last night mode,


press the SELECT button and then proceed
to step 11.

times for each day of the week.

22. To return to the initial program mode, press the

To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR

END button.

button.
7. Press the 9

Programming

button.

00 will blink.

Table

See page 7-4.

8. Enter the minutes using 2 digits.


9. Press the LLG

button.

button.

AM" will blink.


10. Press the SELECT button to alternate between

AM and PM to select the correct setting.


3-14

i.....................-until

the desired

_..................................

extension

group number (1 through

until the desired

:. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. A=B

8) appears

mode appears

Disable

: to disable

Enable

: to enable

Hunting:.--....default
(all 8 groups)

Hunting

: to assign the same of all 8 extension

groups

Description
5. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.

Enables programming to automatically


locate
an idle extension within the same extension
group as the dialed extension when the
dialed extension number is busy.
Call Hunting is set by group units. Extension
Group Assignment (on page 3-66) is used to
specify which extensions belong to each
group.

6. l To advance to the next extension group


number, press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous extension group
number, press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired extension group
number, press the SELECT button and then
dial the extension group number.

Programming
1. Dial (08).

Hunting

Group will be displayed.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the assignment


of the other hunting groups.

2. Press the NEXT button.


Group NO ? --) will be displayed.

8. To return to the initial program mode,


press the END button.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the extension


group number ( 1 through 8 ).
Group 1 : Disable will he displayed and
Disable will blink.
4. Press the SELECT button to alternate
Disable and Enable.

Conditions
o When you dial 4 instead of pressing the
NEXT button at step 3, in case all of 8 groups
have been programmed to Disable,
Group */: Disable will be displayed.
In case each of 8 groups has been programmed
either Disable or Enable,
_
Group x: Mixed will be displayed.

between

Programming Table
See page 7-4.

3-15

i................until

the desired

extension

; until the desired


;
;

Terminate
[ Circular

(1 through

8) appears.

hunting type appears

: searching
: circular

A=m

group number

for larger jack numbers


searching

upward

..... default-(all

8 groups)

for other numbers

: to assign the same of all 8 extension

groups

~.,.............................~

Discription
Specifies

are searched

when Call Hunting is used.

The Terminate
extensions

Mode searches

Group 1 : Terminate will be displayed


Terminate will blink.

for idle

with a higher order extension

the jack number of the dialed


terminates

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the extension


group number (1 through 8).

the order in which idle extensions

extension,

when the search reaches

than
and

4. Press the SELECT button to alternate

the

highest jack number of extension

in the same

group. If all higher order numbers

are busy, a

between

extension

Mode searches

6.

are busy, a busy tone will be

heard.
The Setting (Call Hunting) on page 3-l 5 must
be set to Enable

mode for Hunting

and Circular.
button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

for any idle

in the same group.

If all extensions

Terminate

5. Press the MEMORY

busy tone will be heard.


The Circular

Type to

be used.

To advance to the next extension group


number, press the NEXT button.
To return to the previous extension group
number, press the PREV button.
To go to the desired extension group
number, press the SELECT button and then
dial the extension group number.

Programming
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the

1. Dial (09).

Hunting

hunting Type of the other groups.

Type will be displayed.

8. To return to the initial program

2. Press the NEXT button.


Group

NO ?+

and

press the END button.

will be displayed.

Programming Table
See page 7-4.
3-16

mode,

The selective

use of this feature

permits

restricted

assigned

to a particular

station which prohibits

available

eight Classes

of Service.

I\
calls

international

I toll

calls

calls

Class

6.7

A
I

local calls

IE

I A

I A

I A

I F

ID ID ID ID ID I

IA

I D

A : Allow
D : Deny
E (Service

Class 3) : Only area code selected

F (Service

Class 5) : Only Exchange

code selected

can be dialed.

G (Service

Class 7) : Only Exchange

code selected

cannot be dialed.

The following

should

l Toll

Restriction

l Allowable

can be dialed.

be set.

l Area Type Selection


l CO Operator

stations. A Class of Service

IA

I local calls(charged)l

to specific

or limits that stations dialing

Service

operator

dialing

on page 3-18.

Call-Boundary

Class on page 3-l 9.

of System Speed Dialing on page 3-20.

Exchange Code Selection on page 3-21.

l Area Code Entry For Class 3 on page 3-22.


l Exchange

Code Entry For Class 5 on page 3-23.

l Exchange

Code Entry For Class 7 on page 3-24.

l Service Class Assignment

of Toll Restriction on page 3-67.

3-17

D
D

ability. The following

can be
are the

until the desired type appears


type A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . default
type B
type C

Description
Area types specific to local telephone
There are three area types available

can be selected

numbers

Area code

Type A : Toll calls (long distance)


Local calls

..................................

Type B : Toll calls (long distance)


Local calls

Local calls (charge)


Local calls

...........

.................................

Type C : Toll calls (long distance)

for toll restrictions.

as shown below.

..........

Exchange code

Exchange code
Subscriber number

Apa ,.ode
Exchange code

Subscriber number
Subscriber number

1 - Areacode

....................

................................

Exchange code

Subscriber number

Service Class Assignment of Toll Restriction (on page 3-67) should be programmed.
When area type 6 or C is selected, the selected Exchange Code must be entered using the Allowable
Code Selection (on page 3-21) programming.

Programming
1.

Dial (10).
Area Type will be displayed.

2.

Press the NEXT button.


Area Type - A will be displayed
A will blink.

Programming Table
See page 7-5.

and the

3.

Repeat pressing the SELECT button until


the desired type (A, B, C) is displayed.

4.

Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

5.

To return to the initial program mode, press the


END button.

3-18

Exchange

,...................................

A=m

: to select boundary

class l...... default

121: class 2
131: class 3
cl4 :class4
05 :class5
cl6 : class 6
171 : class 7

Programming

Description
Toll Restriction,
CO Operator
extensions
Operator

Calls. However,

can be permitted

extension

prohibits

1. Dial (11).

the desired

Operator

a boundary

2. Press the NEXT button.

number

Boundary

Calls are allowed

from service

class 1 to the same

3. Dial the boundary

: If Boundary

Class 4 is set for

then CO operator

allowed,

assigned

but extensions

8 will be prohibited

the END button.

calls are

service class 5 to

Programming table

calls.

(See the table below.)

See page 7-5.


Class Number

Service Class of
Toll Restriction

A : CO Operator
D : CO Operator
See Service

Calls are allowed.


Calls are denied.

Class Assignment

class number (1 through


button.

5. To return to the initial program

from placing CO operator

Boundary

and

The LCD will stop blinking.

numbers for which service classes 1 to

4 have been assigned,

will be displayed

4. Press the MEMORY

boundary number, but are prohibited at the


extensions which has not done the above setting.
Example

Class-l

1 will blink.

at all the

class number as the programmed

All extension

Class will be displayed.

to call to CO

class.

CO Operator
service

if it is programmed,

by programming

of service

: class 8

of Toll

Restriction on page 3-67.

3-19

mode, press

8).

~.~~.~......~..~....~ until the desired


Restriction

mode appears
: will be restricted

No Restriction:

by a Service

will not be restricted.

Programming Table

Description
Through

programming,

classes

1 through

Toll restrictions

(service

8) set for each extension

See page 7-5.

can

be applied to System Speed dialing, too.


In the Restriction mode, System Speed dialing is
restricted according to the Service Class.
In the No Restriction mode, System Speed dialing
is not restricted according to the Service Class.

Programming
1. Dial (12).

Restrct of SSD will be displayed.


2. Press the NEXT button.
Restriction

will be displayed

and blink.

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate


between

Restriction

to.select

the desired

4. Press the MEMORY

and No Restriction
mode.
button.

The LCD will stop blinking.


5. To return to the initial program

mode, press

the END button.

3-20

Class......:..default

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
until the desired
~~appears
.-.............. .................._

CDE=

memory code number (01 through

exchange

Nothing

m.............................................

code with 3 digits

is stored

AB=(Olm

12(kl:

20)

. . . . . ..-default

(all 20 memory codes)

: memory number 01

memory number 20

Programming

Description
The exchange code and area code usually differ
for local and long distance calls, but in some

1. Dial (13).
Ext. Local Codewill

when Area Type B or Type C is selected with the


Area Type Selection (on page 3-18) programming.
When you select these Area Types, you should
register these exchange code as a local number.
So these registered exchange codes will allow you to
make a local call. It is therefore necessary to register
these Exchange Codes to enable dialing of these
numbers.

2. Press the NEXT button.


Local NO ? + will be displayed.

Local call Exchange


Exchange

3. Dial the memory code number (01 through


20) or press the NEXT button.
Example:
When dialing (01) or pressing the NEXT
button.
l The LCD will show Local 01: ... when
nothing is stored in memory code number
01 .
When area code 212 has beenstored,
Local 01 : 212 will be displayed.

Codes when Type B is selected

4. Dial the local code, using 3 digits.


l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button.

code

hod-oooo
t
Oor1

5. Press the MEMORY button.


l The memory indicator will. be lit.

Local call (charge) Exchange


selected

6. l To advance to the next memory code


number, press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous memory code
number, press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired memory code
number, press the SELECT button and
then dial the memory code number.

Codes when Type C is

Exchangecode

be displayed.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6.
Oor1

A maximum

20 Exchange

8. To return to the initial program


the END button.
Codes can be registered.

Programming Table.
See page 7-5.
3-21

_.
mode, press

,...........,..................

until the desired

i . . .... . . . . . . . . . ...............

CI)E = areacode
Nothing

memory number (01 through

20) appears

with 3 digits

is stored

,.....,defauIt

(all 20 memory numbers)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . AB= [~~~~ : memory number 01 for storage of an area code

/ak[

: memory numb& 20 for storage of an area code

I
4. Dial the area code, using 3 digits.

Description
For Service

Class 3 (see Toll Restriction

on

button.

page 3-17) up to 20 area codes can be selected


for use in toll dialing.
All area codes except

5. Press the MEMORY


those entered

will be

denied.
All the extensions
Service

that are programmed

Class Selections

3 are assigned

same area code selection

button.

The memory indicator

6. l To advance

for

will be lit.

to the next memory number,

press the NEXT button.

to the

plan.

To return to the previous

To go to the desired

memory number,

press the PREV button.

Programming

memory number,

press the SELECT button and then dial the

1. Dial (14).

memory number.

Cls-3 Area Code will be displayed.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6.

2. Press the NEXT button.

8. To return to the initial program

Area NO ? --)I will be displayed.


3. Dial the memory number

(01 through

the END button.


20)

or press the NEXT button.

Programming Table.
See page 7-5.

Example:

When dialing

To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR

(01) or pressing

the NEXT

button.
The LCD will showArea-01
: .-- when
nothing is stored in memory number
01 .
When area code 212 has been stored,
Area - 01 : 212 will be displayed.

3-22

mode, press

~.~......~~.~............ until the desired

memory number (01 through

CDE = exchange

: ........................

Nothing

co&

with 3 digits

is stored ......... default

. AB=pi/il:

20) appears

(all 20 memory numbers)

memory number 01 for storage of.exchange

code

: memory number 20 for storage of exchange code

Description
For Service

Class 5 (See Toll Restriction

page 3-17), up to 20 exchange


selected

for use in local dialing

All exchange

codes except

4. Dial the exchange code, using 3 digits.


l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button.

on

codes can be
(charged).

those entered

will

5. Press the MEMORY button.


l The memory indicator will be lit.

be denied.
All extensions
Selections

programmed

5 are assigned

code selection

for Service

Class
6. l To advance to the next memory number,
press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous memory number,
press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired memory number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
memory number.

to the same exchange

plan.

Programming
1. Dial (15).

Cls-5 Local Code will be displayed.


2. Press the NEXT button.
Local

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6.

NO ? -+ will be displayed.

3. Dial the memory number

(01 through

8. To return to the initial program


the END button.

20)

or press the NEXT button.


Example:

When dialing

(01) or pressing

the NEXT

Programming Table.

button.
l The LCD will show Local

nothing

See page 7-6.

01 : --. when

is stored in memory number

01 .
When exchange
stored, Local

code 392 has been


01 : 392 will be

displayed.

3-23

mode, press

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
until
~~~~~~~~
the desired
I

:...........................

CDE

Nothing

memory number

exchange

code

with

is stored,..... default

(01 through 20) appears

digits

(all 20 memory numbers)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB=mrl:

memory number 01 for storage of exchange

2 0 : memory
ml

number 20 for storage of exchange

code

code

Description
For Service

Class 7 (See Toll Restriction

page 3-17), up to 20 exchange


selected

codes can be

for use in local dialing.

Exchange

codes programmed

All the extensions


Service

4. Dial the exchange code, using 3 digits.


l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button.

on

Class Selections

same exchange

will be denied.

that are programmed


7 are assigned

code selection

5. Press the MEMORY button.


l The memory indicator will be lit.

for
to the

6. l To advance to the next memory number,


press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous memory number,
press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired memory number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
memory number.

plan.

Programming
1. Dial (16).

Cls-7 Local Code will be displayed.


2. Press the NEXT button.
Local

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6.

NO ? + will be displayed.

3. Dial the memory number

(01 through

20)

8. To return to the initial program


the END button.

or press the NEXT button.


Example:

When dialing

(01) or pressing

the NEXT

Programming Table.

button.

See page 7-6.

l The LCD will show Local 01 : . ..when

nothing

is stored in memory number

01 .
When exchange

code 392 has been

stored, Local 01 : 392 will be


displayed.

3-24

mode, press

A=

111: to sound after 1 minute


02 :after 2 minutes
cl3 :after 3 minutes

....... ..default

cl4 :after 4 minutes


cl5 :after 5 minutes
cl6 :after 6 minutes
cl7 : after 7 minutes
cl6 :after 8 minutes:

q9
Description

4. Press the MEMORY

to remind that you still has a call on hold.


will sound after 3 minutes

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

An alarm tone will be heard at the holding extension

The reminder

: after 9 minutes

5. To return to the initial program


but can

mode, press

the END button.

be changed.
There are 9 choices ranging from 1 minute to 9.
An alarm tone is heard from the built-in
of the proprietary
receiver

telephone

of the standard

Conditions

speaker

and the handset

The hold time reminder

telephone.

is activated,

hold recall time set is programmed

See List of Tones on page 6-7.


Example:
4 minutes=

lfim1411MEMORYl

Programming
Programming Table
1. Dial (17).

See page 7-6.

Auto Hold Alarm will be displayed.


2. Press the NEXT button.
Time: 3 min will be displayed

and 3 will

blink.
3. Dial the time number

(1 through

9).

3-25

even if the
to Disable.

_.....,........................................

until the desired

time appears

30sec--default
1 min.
1.5min.
:

2min.
:

Disable

Example:

Description
When the handset

of the holding

extension

is

1.5 minutes=

[18Im
@GGzlFq

replaced on call, you may have the automatic


hold recall after the desired time elapses.
The hold recall can be removed or added.

Programming Table
See page 7-6.

Programming
1. Dial (18).
Hold Recall Time will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
Time: 30 set will be displayed

and 30 set

will blink.
3. Repeat pressing
desired
Disable)

the SELECT button until the

time (30 set, 1 min, 1.5 min, 2 min,


is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.


5. To return to the initial program

mode, press

the END button.

3-26

ml

until the desired mode appears


..................

Programming

Description
If a call is transferred
other extension

to an extension,

1. Dial (19).

and the

Transfer

does not answer the transferred

call within 30 seconds,

the call will return to you.

Extension

Recall will be displayed.

2. Press NEXT button.

The time may be changed to 2 minutes.


Refer to Call Transfer-To

Time: 30 set will be displayed


on page 4- 18.

and the 30

will blink.
3. Press the SELECT button to alternate

between

2 min and 30 set to select the desired


mode.
4. Press the MEMORY

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.


5. To return to the initial program
the END button.

Programming Table
See page 7-6.

3-27

mode, press

until the desired

time appears

1ring delay
2rings delay
3rings delay

._

default

4rings delay

Programming

Description
Enables

programming

delayed

start time (after 1, 2, 3, or 4 rings) in

case of no receiving
Forwarding-Busy

-. _ _ -

1. Dial (20).

the call forwarding

Call FWD Delay will be displayed.

the call when the Call


2. Press the NEXT button.

or No Answer (on page 4-27)

feature is set.

3 rings delay will be displayed

and will

blink.
3. Repeat pressing
desired

the SELECT button until the

time is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program


the END button.

Programming Table
See page 7-7.

3-28

mode, press

until the desired


lsec

time appears

: dials after I second

2sec : dials after 2 seconds


3sec : dials after 3 seconds
4sec : dials after 4 seconds

Programming Table

Description
Enables

programming

of the pickup

See page 7-7.

dial (on

page 5-18) start time (the delay between


picking

up the handset

The default

and automatic

is 3 sec.,Which

dialing).

can be changed

to 1,

2, or 4 sec.

Programming
1. Dial (21).

Pickup

Dial Time will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


PUD Time : 3sec will be displayed

and 3

will blink.
3. Repeat Pressing
desired

the SELECT button until the

time ( lsec,

2sec, 3sec, 4sec ) is

displayed:
4. Press the MEMORY

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.


5. To return to the initial program

mode, press

the END button..

3-29

.. ......-.default

_............................................_

AB=

a_

: to limit the time to 1 minute

!
1 0 :to limit the time to 10 minutes
OD

Description

Conditions
l To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR

Enable limiting of the time any outside line can be


used when Call Transfer-To

Outside

page 4-19) or Call Forwarding-To


(on page 4-29) is used to forward

button.

Line (on

Outside

Line

Programming Table

a outside call

See page 7-7.

to an outside line or when you call to any outside


line using DISA.
The default time is 10 min., but this can be
changed

from 1 minute through 32 minutes.

Programming
1. Dial (22).
CO-CO

Dur. Limit will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


Time
will

: 10 min will be displayed

and 10

blink.

3. Enter the duration


(1 through

..... . default

limit with 1 or 2 digits

32). z

4. Press the MEMORY

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.


5. To return to the initial

program

mode, press

the END button.

3-30

Description
By plugging output unit such as a printer with RS-232C, record of all incoming and outgoing calls, the contents registered
in System Programming and System Working Report can be confirmed.

n Information prints out on outside line calls.


l

Starting time of call (Date, time)


Extension number
l CO number
l

0 Dialed number
0 Duration time of call
0 Account code

0 Transfer mark x
DISA Security Code

.
Example of print out

Time

Date

8:OOAM
81201 a8
:::
:::
: :
:. :.. . . . .-. . . . . war
day
;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . mont,,

EXT.

CO

101

06

8:l OAM

l-201 -234-5678

CL
number
:..... Extension

8120188

Dial Number

120

03

called
party

Code

Duration

0123

00 :0030
: :
:
:
: :
s....-second
: :
:. :.. . . . . . . . . . minute
i . . . . . . . . hour

account
code

number
( DISA incoming)

00:0050

0
DISA
Security
Code

: *..*incoming call

OThe previous number of =I that appears in the


dial number indicates the line access number of the
Host PBX (See page 3-51.)
0 The * that appears in front of the Time means
that the call is transferred.
0 DISA Security Code
0: No security mode
1: Security code 1
2: Security code 2
3: Security code 3
4: Security code 4
5: Remote code
0 CO Line number is indicated instead of Extension
number when call to CO line by using Direct Inward
System Access.

0 Incoming calls
l
Number of incoming calls
l
Number of answered calls
l
Number of unanswered calls
l
Percentage of answer
l
Average ring time
l
Average duration
0 Outgoing calls
l
Number of access requested
l
Number of access succeeded
l
Number of access failed
l
Percentage of access succeeded
l
Average duration

nThe following features should be set.


0 RS-232C Communication
l

Parameters on page 3-32.

SMDR Parameters on page 3-35.

n System programming contents are printed out.

l Incoming/Outgoing

0 System parameter
0 CO parameter
l Extension parameter
l DSS parameter
l Speed Call
n System Working Report is printed out.
l Date of record
l
Starting date of recording
l
Date and time printed out

Secret Speed Dial/One Touch Dial Printing on page 3-36.

System Data Dump on page 3-37.

Duration Time Count Start Mode on page 3-40.

Call Selection

for printing on page 3-36.

0 Account Code Input Mode on page 3-71.


When plugging a printer into the KX-Tl23211
make sure that the printer power is off.

3-31

(Carriage return for a new line)


until the desired

code appears

(Baud rate)
:...........................................

until the desired baud rate appears


-

IlOB
1508
300B
600B
1200B ... .. . . . . . . . ..default
2400B
48008

_ 96008

(Word length)
; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired

(Parity)
!........... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired

mode appears

_ None

Mark .... . .. .. ... .. . d,efault


Space
Even
L Odd

(Stop bit length)


i . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired

3-32

Word length

Carriage return for a new line


A new line code indicates what type of code is
needed for the print head on a printer to move the
first character position on the next line.
when CR+LFis

required

when CR is required

A word length code indicates


compose a character.
7 bits
8 bits

from

how many bits

when 7 bits are required.


when 8 bits are required.

from a printer.

Stop bit length

CR=Carriage
Return
LF=Line
Feed.

A stop bit length code indicates the end of a bit


string which composes a character.
when one bit is required

Baud rate

for end detection.

A baud rate code indicates the data transmission


speed from the system to a printer.
1lOB
150B
300 B
600 B
1200 B
2400 B
4800 B
9600 B

when
when
when
when
when
when
when
when

110
150
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600

baud
baud
baud
baud
baud
baud
baud
baud

is
is
is
is
is
is
is
is

required.
required.
required.
required.
required.
required.
required.
required.

The default value is the same as that of the


Panasonic data terminal, KX-D4985, KX-D4910D,
KX-D4911, KX-D4920, etc, except baud rate.

Parity
A parity code indicates what type of parity is used
to detect an error in a string of bits composing a
character.
None
Mark
Space
Even
Odd

when an error checking function is not


required from a printer.
when a Mark is required from a printer.
when a Space is required from a printer.
when an Even is required from a printer.
when an Odd is required from a printer.

%
8

3-33

Programming
1. Dial (23).
RS232C Parameter will be displayed.

12. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the


desired parity code is displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


NL-Code : CR + LF will be displayed and
CR+ LF will blink.

13. Press the M EMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.
14. Press the NEXT button.
Stop Bit : 1bit will be displayed
1 bit will blink.

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate


between CR + LF and CR to select the
desired mode.

15. Press the SELECT button to alternate


between1 bitand 2bits to select the
desired mode.

4. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.
5. Press the NEXT button.
Baud Rate : 1200B will be displayed
1200B will blink.

16. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

and the

17. To return to the initial program


the END button.

6. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the


desired baud rate is displayed.

See page 7-7.

6. Press the NEXT button.


Word Lengt : 7bit will be displayed
7bit will blink.

Conditions

and the

To return to the previous

The following
parity

Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

mark

11. Press the NEXT button.

be displayed

mode, press the

PREV button instead of the NEXT button.

9. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


7bit and 8bit to select the desired mode.
mode.

Parity : Mark will


Mark will blink.

mode,press

Programming Table

7. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

10.

and the

combinations

I word length
1

are disallowed.
I stop bit length

space

space

and the
If any of the above disallowed
selected,

combinations

are

Warning tone will be heard. Press

the NEXT button and then repeat the procedure


of programming.

3-34

(Page length)

(Skip perforation)

Page length
The page length

may be selected

to position

title and data on each page.


A page length code indicates

print head does not skip.

print head skips the last line.

2
. i

the number of

lines per page.

!&

A title will be printed

print head skips the last 2 lines.

print head skips the last 95 lines.

on the first 3 lines of each

page.

Programming
4

4 lines per page

99

99 lines per page

STANDARD

CONTINUOUS

PAPER(ll

1. Dial (24).
SMDR Parameter will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
Page Length : 66 will be displayed
66 will blink.

inches)

3. Dial (4 through
entry.

paw

66 lines

_~ ____....._......._
0
0
0

5. Press the NEXT button.


Skip Perf : 0 will be displayed
will blink.

skip
perforation

0
0
0

machine
z perforations

6. Dial (0 through
code entry.

To print data, page length


skip perforation

0
E

must be longer

than

of lines to be skipped.
reaches

Programming Table
See page 7-8.

the number

When the print head

the line designated,

moves to the top position

95) for the skip-perforation

8. To return to the initial program


the END button.

Skip perforation
code indicates

and the 0

7. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

by 4 or more lines.

The skip perforation

99) for the page length

4. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

length

and the

the print head

of the next page.


3-35

mode, press

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. until the desired mode appears


Outgoing : On __ to print outgoing
[ Outgoing : Off __ to stop printing

, .. ..

00ti00~0~
25

NEXT

SELECT

MEMORY

NEXT

SELECT

__ default

until the desired mode appears


Incoming : On __ to print incoming
[ Incoming : Off __ to stop printing

MEMORY

Description
It is possible to print outgoing
incoming calls or both.

calls

calls __ default

END

4. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

calls or

5. Press the NEXT button.


Incoming : On will be displayed
On will blink.

Programming
1. Dial (25).
Duration Log will be displayed.

and the

6. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


On and Off to select the desired mode.

2. Press the NEXT button.


Outgoing : On will be displayed
On will blink.

7. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

and the

8. To return to the initial program


the END button.

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


the On and Off to select the desired
mode.

mode, press

Programming Table
See page 7-8.

,.............................
until the desired

mode appears

Description

Enables programming to print out secret dialing


numbers, even though these secret numbers are
not displayed on the LCD during speed dialing
(System Speed Dialing Entry on page 3-5) or
one-touch dialing (on page 4-4) are used.

3. Press the SELECT button to:alternate


between No Printing and Printing
select the desired mode.
4. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
5. To return to the initial program
the END button.

Programming
1. Dial (26)

Secret

Programming Table:

Printing will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


No Printing will be displayed

to

See page 7-a.


and blink.

3-36

mode, press

0 stop output

i.................-

until the Stop Output appears

,.....................................

l All Parameters

until desired

- All

0 System Parameter

System Para

l Speed Dial

co

Para

EXT

Para

DSS

Para

Speed

Dial

- stop

o CO Parameter

(Outside)

.................

output

until the CO Para appears


i . . . . . . .1 ABEN

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

mliJ:

i
27 NEXT SELECT
El~nn~nn

l Extension

data dump mode appears


..... ..... ...... ..... ... default

Para

Parameter

MEMORY

i.........-

AB

on CO 01

m:onCO12

MEMORY

END

until the EXT Para appears


: to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

l DSS Parameter

~~~~~~~~~~~~~
until
~~~~the DSS Para appears
.. . .

A=

: to assign the same on all 2 DSSs

[71

:onDSSl
.

02 :onDSS2
27 NEXT SELECT
OOO
$~

MEMORY

A MEMORY

3-37

END

Extension parameters

Description
Six separate

printouts

They are (1) System parameters


parameters

nWhen the Proprietary telephone

are available.

(3) Extension

(2) CO

parameters

(4) DSS

parameters (5) Speed dial and (6) All parameters


System parameters
Day/

Telephone
Extension

name

Extension

group

Account

Trunk group assignments


Extension

number

Extension

group assignments

assignments

Hunting.group
extension

DSS console

Doorphone

code input mode

CO transfer

mode

CO forward

mode

Executive

busy override

Executive

busy override

mode

receive

extensions

Outgoing

preference

Incoming

preference

Line ringing
Intercom

Area type

assignment

call

BGM mode

Speed dial restriction


Operator

Do not disturb

call class

Call forwarding

Area code of class-3

Call waiting

Exchange

code of class-5

Exchange

code of class-7

Exchange

code with exception

SMDR (Station Message

Call waiting

tone

Data line security


Detail Recording)

parameters

Dial Call pickup

deny

Absent message
Timed reminder

RS-232C parameters

Station lock

Hold recall time

Auto answer mode

Auto hold alarm time

CO button assignments

Transfer

DSS button assignments

recall time

Call forwarding

count

Pickup dial waiting


External
Active

paging

time

access tone

DTM F receiver

CO-CO

deny

DND override

set

DSS operation

type

Toll restriction

Night

Operator

is connected

at extension.

Duration

time limit

DISA parameters

Feature button assignment


<DSS

Console

Items>>

Console type
DSS connection
DSS button assignments
Feature button assignments

OPX
n When the standard
extension

OHCA mode
CO parameters
Connection

Telephone

CO mode
Dialing

parameters

Trunk group

telephone

type

Extension

name

Extension

group

Toll restriction
Account

code input mode

Access with 9
Host PBX access code

CO transfer

mode

CO forward

mode

Hookswitch

flash time

Executive

busy override

Disconnect

time

Executive

busy override

Pause time
CPC detection
Outgoing

extension

is connected

DND override

deny

at

To print CO Parameter ;
1. Dial (27).

Do not disturb
Call forwarding
Call waiting
Data line security
Dial call pickup deny
Absent message
Timed reminder
Station lock
Pickup dial

2. Press the NEXT button.


3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until
_
the CO Para is displayed.
4. Press the MEMORY button.
CO NO ? + is displayed.
5. Dial the CO number (01 through 12).
When dialing (Ol),
CO NO ? + 01 will be displayed.

DSS parameters
6. Press the MEMORY button.
SMDR printer will print out.

Console type
Pair extension
DSS connection
DSS button assignment
Feature button assignment

7. Repeat steps 5 to 6, to print the other CO


parameter.

Speed dial
Speed access codes (00 through 99) in
which phone numbers are stored may be
printed.

Parameter ;

1. Dial (27).

2. Press the NEXT button.


3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the
EXT Para is displayed.

All parameters
System parameters
CO parameters
Extension parameters
DSS parameters
Speed Dial

4. Press the MEMORY button.


Jack NO ? + will be displayed.
5. Dial the jack number (01 through 32).
When dialing (Ol),
Jack NO ? + 01 will be displayed.

Operation
To stop the printout

To print Extension

6. Press the MEMORY button.


SMDR printer will print out.

7. .

1. Dial (27).

2. Press the NEXT button.

Repeat steps 5 to 6, to print the other jack


number.

To print DSS Parameter ;

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until


Stop Output is displayed.

1. Dial (27).

4. Press the MEMORY

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the


DSS Para is displayed.

To print

button.

System Parameters,
All Parameters ;

Speed Dial or

1. Dial (27).

System

Data Dump will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


Menu : All Para will be displayed
All Para will blink.

and

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until


the desired data dump mode is displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.

4. Press the MEMORY button.


DSS NO ? + will be displayed.
5. Dial the DSS number (1 or 2j.
When dialing (l),
DSS NO ? + 1 will be displayed.
6. Press the MEMORY button.
SMDR printer will print out.
7,

. Repeat steps 5 to 6, to print the other DSS


parameter.

4. Press the MEMORY button.


SMDR printer will print out.

After completing printihg, to return to the initial

5. Repeat steps 3 to 4, to print the other data


dumps.

1. Press the END button.

mode ;

Programming Table
See page 7-9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . .. . . . . .

until

the

desired

time

app&&

Instantly
5s after dial

............................. default

1OS after dial

-_ .:

15s after dial


~IINEXTIISELECTIIMEMORY

Description

Example:

The duration
displayed

time of the conversation

on the LCD and is printed

10 seconds

is
on the

after dialing

= ~l1NEXTIISELECTIIMEMORY]

printer.

Programming Table

Program the starting time of the record.


l

Instantly

See page 7-9.

after the CO line is captured.

l 5 seconds

after the dialing.

l 10 seconds

after the dialing.

l 15 seconds

after the dialing.

Programming
1. Dial (28).

Durat-Time

Count will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


5s after dial will be displayed

3. Repeat pressing
desired

and blink.

the SELECT button until the

time (Instantly,

5s after dial, 10s after

dial, 15s after dial) is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. To return to the initial program

mode, press

the END button.

3-40

,..............until

the desired

_...........................

external

paging equipment

I
, until the-desired
Enable-

number (1 or 2) appears

mode appears

. ..-...default

(external

pagingj

and 2)

Disable

Description

6. Repeat steps 3 to 5, to program the access tone

The acknowledge
accessing
removed

=&

of the other external

tone that is heard after

the external

paging equipment

or added at the customers

Refer to Paging-External

can be

paging

equipment.

7. To return to the initial program

mode, press

the END button.

request.

on page 4-25.
Example:

Programming

To eliminate the access paging tone on external


paging 1.

1. Dial (29).
Ext-Pag

Ack-Tone

will be displayed.

piqiEElINEXTIJSELECTIIMEMORY[

2. Press the NEXT button.


Pag NO?+

will be displayed.

Programming Table

3. Press the NEXT button.


Pag 1: Enable will be displayed

See page 7-9.

and

Enable will blink.


4. Press the SELECT button to alternate
Enable and Disable

between

to select the desired

mode.
5. Press the MEMORY

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

3-41

Programming

Description

c
1. Dial (31).
DISA Parameters will be displayed.

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) is the


feature that enables outside line incoming calls to
be directed to an extension phone by designating
it or to an outside line through the KX-Tl23211.
When programmed, the following contents of
DISA can be set up.
n Control code *
Sets to ignore the signal of I*

2. Press the NEXT button.


Control Code x I will be displayed.
0 You may repeat pressing the NEXT button
until the desired mode (Control code 3~ ,
Prolong Time, Answer. Delay Time, Tone
Detect, Security Type, Remote Security
Code, User Security Code) is displayed.

key.

n Prolong Time
Sets duration time of talking past CO-to-CO
Duration Time Limit when dialing out on an
outside line (2, 3, 4 or 5 minutes)

3. Press the SELECT button.


Code * : Enable will be displayed
Enable will blink.

n Answer Delay Time


Changes the time from receiving a call to
answering it. (0, 5, 10 or 15 seconds)

and

4. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


Enable and Disable to select the desired
mode.

n Tone Detect
KX-T123211 is set whether detect that the
call is disconnected after finish having a
conversation on CO line with Tone.
Enable . . . . detect with Tone.
dont detect with Tone.
Disable . . .

5. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.
6. Press the NEXT button.
Prolong Time will be displayed.

n Security Type
Sets to require or not a Security Code when
dialing an extension or outside line.
l None Security
This is the mode in which Security Code
is unnecessary when dialing both an
extension or outside line.
l Trunk Security
This is the mode in which Security Code
is necessary when dialing an outside line,
but unnecessary when dialing an
extension.
l All Security
This is the mode in which Security Code
is neccessary when dialing both extension
and outside line.

7. Press the SELECT button.


Prolg Time: 5 min will be displayed
will blink.

and 5

6. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the


desired add time (2, 3, 4 or 5 minutes) is
displayed.
9. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
10. Press the NEXT button.

Ans. Delay Time will be displayed.


11. Press the SELECT

button.
Delay Time: 10 set will be_displayed
10 will blink.

n Remote Security-Code
Remote Security Code is used when
Remote Administration is done with DISA.

and

12. Press the SELECT button until the desired


delay time (0, 5, 10 or 15 seconds) is
displayed.

n User Security Code


User Security Code is used when dial to
extension or CO line with DISA.
User Security Code can be set by 4 types.

13. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.
I

3 - 43

29. Dial the code number with 4 digits (0000


through 9999)..
0 To erase an incorrect entry, press the
CLEAR button.

14. Press the NEXT button.


Tone Detect will be displayed.
15. Press the SELECT button.
Tone Det: Enable will be displayed
Enable will blink.

and
30. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.

16. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


Enable and Disable to select the desired
mode.

31. To return to the initial program mode, press the


END button.

17. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

Programming Table

16. Press the NEXT button.


Security Type will be displayed.

Conditions

See page 7-10

0 The Direct Inward System Access (DISA) cards


19. Press the SELECT button.
Trunk Security will be displayed

and blink.

20. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the


desired security mode (None Security, Trunk
Security or All Security) is displayed.
21. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
22. Press the NEXT button.
Remote Sec. Code will be displayed.
23. Press the SELECT button.
RMT-Code : 70000 will be displayed
0000 will blink.

and

24. Dial the code number with 4 digits (0000


through 9999).
l To erase an incorrect entry, press the
CLEAR button.
25. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
26. Press the NEXT button.
User Sec. Code will be displayed.
27. Press the SELECT button.
USR-Code 1 : 60000 will be displayed
0000 will blink.

and

26. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the


desired user code (1, 2, 3 or 4) is displayed.

are necessary to program the Remote Security


Code and User Security Code.

~............~I

until the desired mode appears

Description
Enables a standard telephone installed outside the
premise to work as an extension in the premise
through public or private lines.
Optional Off Premise Extension (OPX) Card
KX-T123285 and Unit KX-T123286 are
necessary.

Programming
1. Dial (32).
OPX Feature will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
OPX: Disable will be displayed
Disable will blink.

and

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


Enable and Disable to select the desired mode.
4. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
5. To return to the initial program mode, press the
END button.

Programming Table
See page 7-11.

until the desired mode appears

Description
Allows an extension user to intrude through the
speaker into another extension that is in
conversation using the handset.
(This feature only is available when KX-T123235
sets are used.)

Programming
1. Dial (33).
OHCA Feature will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
OHCA: Enable will be displayed
Enable will blink.

and

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


Enable and Disable to select the desired mode.
4. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
5. To return to the initial program mode, press the
END button.

Programming Table
See page 7-l 1.

until the desired mode appears


Dump Start . . . . . . . . - Dump Stop
SWR Data Clear

default

Programming

Description

1. Dial (34).
Working

KX-Tl23211
automatically records the working
state of System.
The recording starts when the System Working
Report is cleared.
Programming this feature enables to clear the
record or output the records of working state to
SMDR.

2. Press the NEXT button.


Dump Start will be displayed

4. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

1. Date of record
0 The date and time cleared.
0 The date and time printed out.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, to select another

mode.
6. To return to the initial program mode, press the
END button.

incoming calls
answered of incoming calls
unanswered of incoming calls
answered calls to the

Programming Table
See page 7-11.

Number of answered

calls

Number of incoming

calls

100 (%)

The average time from receipt of call to


answer of the incoming and answered calls
The average duration time of talk of the
answered calls
3. Outgoing calls
l The number
0 The number
0 The number
0 The ratio of

of access requested
of access succeeded
of access failed
access succeeded

Number of access succeeded

x 100 (%)

Number of access requested


0 The average

duration

and blink.

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the


desired mode (Dump Stan, Dump Stop or
SWR Data Clear) is displayed.

Contents Recorded

2. Incoming calls
The number of
The number of
The number of
The ratio of the
incoming calls

Report will be displayed.

of the dialed calls.

3 - 47

Outside Line Feature

......... until the desired

CO number (01 through

12) appears.

until the desired


Connect

mode appears

. . ..-......default

(all 12 Cds)

Not Connect

i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .. .

/I@=

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

ml?J

:onCOOl

lij~l

: on CO 12

IDescription

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program


on the other CO lines.

You can program which outside line is


connected and which one is not connected.
When an extension automatically
selects an
idle outside line, the extension can be
connected to it quickly.

8. To return to the initial program


press the END button.

Programming
1. Dial (40).
CO Connection

1.
the mode

mode,

Conditions
0 When you dial 4 instead of pressing the
NEXT button at step 3, in case all of 12 COs
have been programmed to Connect,
CO *: Connect will be displayed.
In case each of 12 COs has been
programmed either Connect or Not
Connect, CO *: Mixed will be displayed.

will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


CO NO ? + will be displayed.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO
number (01 through 12).
CO 01 : Connect will be displayed and
Connect will blink.
4. Press the SELECT button, to alternate
between Connect and Not Connect to select
the desired mode.

Example :
CO 1 and 2 .................... Connect
CO 3 ........................ Not Connect

5. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.
8. l To advance to the next CO number,
press the NEXT button.
0 To return to the previous CO number,
press the PREV button.
0 To go to the desired CO number,
press the SELECT button and
then dial the CO number.

1.

I40JINEXTJINEXTJJl

2.

I~~~

3.

WISELECTJliGKFllKJ

Programming Table
See page 7-12.
3-48

!.....................-unti

I the desired

, ......................................

CO number

(01 through

12) appears

until the desired dial mode appears


..
DTMF Mode . . . . . . default (all 12 COs)
Pulse Mode
Call Blocking Mode

;....................................................

AB=

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

lolj?J

: on CO 01

nr;il

:onCO12

Description
Allows the user to select the dialing mode (tone,
pulse or call blocking) of each CO (Central Office)

4. Repeat

line.

DTMF Dial Mode

5. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking .

The dial signal from the extension (with tone


or pulse dial mode) will be converted to TONE.

6. l To advance

TONE will be transmitted

to the Central

desired

until the

CO number,

press the PREV button.


l To go to the desired CO number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the

Office.

CO number.

Call Blocking Mode

7. Repeat Steps 4 to 6, to propgram the dialing


mode on the other central office lines.

Set this mode on outside lines that can receive both


DTMF (Tone) and Pulse dial, but under contract with
the Central Office for Pulse dialing only.
When dialing the outside line using a touch
tone telephone, only Pulse dial is sent to the
Central Off ice.

6. To return to the initial


the END button.

program

mode,

press

Conditions
l If the KX-Tl23211

Programming

Office directly

1. Dial (41).
2. Press the NEXT button.
CO NO ?+ will be displayed.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number


be displayed

is connected to the Central


or installed behind a host PBX,

which receives both tone and pulse dials, the


KX-Tl23211
must be used only in the tone dial
mode.
0 If your extension is not a Proprietary
telephone but a standard telephone, and the

CO Dial Mode will be displayed.

(01 through 12).


CO 01 : DTMF Mode will
DTMF Mode will blink.

button

to the next CO number,

l To return to the previous

The dial signal from the extension (with tone


or pulse dial mode) will be converted to PULSE.
to the Central

the SELECT

press the NEXT button.

Office.

PULSE Dial Mode

PULSE will be transmitted

pressing

dial mode isdisplayed.

dial tone frequency of CO Lines is 600H2, the


KX-Tl23211
must be used only for the pulse
dialing mode for the CO Lines.
-.

and

Programming Table
See page 7-12.

3-49

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -until the desired

CO number

........................

(01 through

up to 8 outside

12) appears

access codes each with a


....~~~~~~~~
default

. .. .. .. ... .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ...

AB=

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

r;;l
ml

&I1

(all 12 COs)

:onCOOl

:onCO12

Description
If KX-T123211

6. l To advance

is installed behind a host PBX, the

host PBX may require a pause time to access

press the NEXT button.


l To return to the previous

Central Office Lines. This feature enables the host


PBX to automatically
outward

dialing

pause via programming

to the next CO number,

the

CO number,

press the PREV button.

access codes of the host PBX.

l To go to the desired

CO number,

press the SELECT button and then dial the


CO number.

Programming

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to program

1. Dial (43).

COs of the KX-T123211.

HostPBXAccesswiII

be displayed.

8. To return

2. Press the NEXT button.

to the initial

program

the END button.

3. Press the NEXTbutton

l AccessCodes

12).

is stored in CO 1.

When the outside

1MEMORY

Programming Table

displayed.

See page 7-12.

4. Enter up to 8 outward
with a maximum

IIENDI

access codes 81,82 has

been stored, CO 01 : 81,82 will be

access codes each

of 2 digits,

punctuating

each

code with the 1 button.


l To erase a wrong

entry, press the CLEAR

button.
5. Press the MEMORY

button.
3-51

,82,83,9onCOl

l The LCD will show CO 01 : Not Stored

when nothing

press

Example:

or dial the CO number

mode,

CO NO ?+ will be displayed.

(01 through

each of the

:..............,........until

the desired

CO number (01 through

12) appears

C= dial the trunk group number (1 through

: trunk group number

: trunk group number 8

8)

_- _

efault

~INEXT*h~(IENDI

CO 01 is assigned

to Trunk group 1.

CO07

to Trunk group 7

;m$akl
.....................

AB=

Description
lines are grouped,

an idle line

within the trunk group is automatically


when an outside

A maximum

grouped

El

and 12 are assigned to Trunk group 8.

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

mlil

:onCOOl

mm

:onCO

12

CO NO ? + will be displayed.

found and

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number

call is placed.

(01 through

8 groups can be assigned.

For example,
telephone

10,ll

2. Press the NEXT button.

When outside
connected

is assigned

CO 08,09,

if subscribing

service

with multiple

companies,

12).

CO 01: TRK GRP-1 will be displayed


will blink.

the CO lines can be


4. Dial the trunk group number

as shown below by each company.

5. Press the MEMORY


Trunk Group 1

and 1

(1 through

8).

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.


Service

Company

6. l To advance

to the next CO number,

press the NEXT button.


Trunk Group 2

l To return to the previous

CO number,

press the PREV button.


Trunk Group 3

0 To go to the desired
Service

Company

CO number,

press the SELECT button and then dial the


CO number.

Refer to Outward Dialing (Individual Trunk Group


Access) on page 4-3 and Flexible CO Button (To
Assign into Trunk Group Access Button) on page
4-57.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program


number on the other CO lines.
6. To return to the initial program

rrogrammmg

END button.

1. Dial (44).

Programming Table

Trunk Group will be displayed.

See page 7-13.


3-52

the trunk group


_.
mode, press the

_....................................-

until the desired

CO number (01 through


until the desired

(...................................................

12) appears

jack number appears

: on jack number 01

: on jack number 32

fi[

: to assign the same on all 32 jacks

until the desired

__ :_

mode appears
(all 32 jack numbers)

EF =m

~~~~~~~~

: to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

zbn
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

jack number 01

; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ;, CD=m

Description

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

7. l To advance to the next jack number,


press the m
button.
l To return to the previous jack number,

Through programming,
you can select which
extensions may be used for outward dialing by
using the day or night mode of operation.

Programming

1. l Dial (45) for day mode.

Day Out CO will be displayed.


l Dial (46) for night mode
Night Out CO will be displayed.

press the m
button.
To go to the desired jack number,
press the
button and then dial the

jack number.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7, to program the assignment
of the other jack numbers.

2. Press the NEXTbutton.


CO NO ? + will be displayed.

9. l To advance to the next CO number, press


the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous CO number, press

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number


(01 through 12).
CO 01 : TFnable
will be displayed.
jack number

the PREV button.


To go to the desired

CO number,

press the

SELECT button and then dial the CO number.

button until the


4. Repeat pressing the m
desired jack number appears, or press the
button and then dial the jack number.

10. Repeat steps 4 to 9, to program the


assignment of the other CO numbers.

5. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


Enable and Disable to select the desired

11. To return to the initial program


the END button.

mode.

Programming Table

6. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

See page 7-14 or 7-15.


3-53

mode, press

i.......-..............................until

the desired

CO number (01 through

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until

the

-I

&sired

jack

number

appears
_

&

:onjacknumber32

: to assign the same on all 32 jacks

CD=[;;l

___I

mode appears

.=......default

(all 32 jack numbers)

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

l To advance

to the next jack number,


press the m
button.
l To return to the previous jack number,
press the m
button.

Through programming,
you can select which
extensions will ring on incoming calls from the
Central Office during the day or night time.

Programming

l To go to the desired

1. 0 Dial (47) for day mode.


Day In CO will be displayed.
0 Dial (48) for night mode.
Night In CO will be displayed.

press the
jack number.

will be displayed.

lack number

the m

button and then dial the

9. l To advance to the next CO number, press


the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous CO number, press
the PREV button.
l To go to the desired CO number, press the
SELECT button and then dial the CO
number.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number


(01 through 12).
CO 01 : vnable

jack number,

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7, to program the


assignment of the other jack numbers.

2. Press the NEXT-button.


CO NO ?+ will be displayed.

4. Repeat pressing

appears

: on jack number 01

until the desired

Description

12)

button until the

10. Repeat steps 4 to 9, to program the


assignment of the other CO numbers.

desired jack number appears, or press the


# button and then dial the jack number.
cl

11. To return to the initial program


the END button.

5. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


Enable and Disable to select the desired
mode.

Programming Table
See page 7-16 or 7-l 7.

6. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.
3-54

mode, press

Example:
l Company

XYZ would like incoming

the following

calls from the Central Office during the day mode to be received

at

zone.
Programming

Jack no. of Extension

CO no.

KX-Tl23211

Jackno.05,06-,,

Programming
1.

14

E\ kl

m m

......*..

All CO numbers

. . . . . .; ;

~isableon

all

have been set to


jack

numbers.

or

or

2.

( H

3.

4.

( m

5.

6.

( l&?l

or lsELECTl m

7.

or

Or m

or

ml

....

* COnumber
01 has been set to
l%able on jack number 02.

jFFi%FllhnEMORYl...............

CO number 02 has been set to


m

lsELECd -1.

)lsElm

lsod

CFCT]

*a
.... .n. .(. CO number 01 has been set to
.
* Enable on jack number 01.

lsEtECTl llVIEMoRVl

Enable

...............

lQsl lsELECTl m..

on jack

number

03,

CO number 02 has been set to


Enable on jack number 04.

CO number 03 has been set to


. . Enable on jack number 05.

................

CO number 03 has been set to


. Enable on jack number 06.
I

6.

Conditions
l When an operator

is not set and OGM card is installed,

ring on any extensions.


3-55

program the CO line which is set with DISA to

:.................,......,..............-until

the desired

CO number

(01 through

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . until the desired


m

12) appears

jack number appears

: on jack number 01

: on jack number 32
n

: to assign the same on all 32 jacks

until the desired mode appears


default (all 32 jack numbers)

EF =B

uescnpuon
The ringing start time during the day can be
delayed on a designated
extension(s) when an

: to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

m----:-a:--

incoming

call is received

from the CO.The

7. l To advance
l

CO line

To return to the previous

jack number,

button.

To go to the desired
press the

Programming

jack number,

button and then dial the

jack number.

1. l Dial (49) for day mode.

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7, to program the


assignment of the other jack numbers.

Day Delayed CO will be displayed.


0 Dial (50) for nrght~mode.
Night Delayed CO will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
CO NO ? + will be displayed.

9. l To advance

CO 01 : ~mmdtly

press

the NEXT button.


To return to the previous CO number, press
the PREV button.
_ -I-_ -- I_ AL_ -I--:.._-I fir\ _..__I-__ -..---*I-_
m I u go w III~:uf3slrw
bu numoer, press trte

will be displayed.

SELECT button and then dial the CO


number.

lack number

4. Repeat pressing the m


button until the
desired jack number appears, or press the
button and then dial the jack number.
-

10. Repeat steps 4 to 9, to program the


assignment of the other CO numbers.
j!. Tn
rat, ,rn tn the, initinl nrnnrnm
mnrln
I ICZLUIII L LI1-z ,lIILIcII py,a
llIG,

the SELECT button until the

the END button.

mode is displayed.

6. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

to the next CO number,

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number


IA4
+hr..,,nh
i3\
\ I LlllULJll
IL,.

desired

button.

press the m

that you want to delay the ring start time during the
day or night mode can be selected through the
programming.

5. Repeat pressing

to the next jack number,

press the m

Programming Table
See pages 7-18 through
3-56

7-21.

,-.rdec
fJl.zPS

n Selecting the Normal or DISA mode

:~.~.....................~..~.~.~....~-

until the desired CO number (01 through 12) appears.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . . . ...... . . . until the Normal or DlSA mode appearS

Normal . . . . .

I . .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .. ... .. ... . ... .

CD=

default (all 12 COs)

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

mliJ

:onCOOl

n Selecting the DIL mode

unti!

,........................................

the

rienird
_--.._..

Cfl
__

nlm-nhnr
II.III

lf11
\ thrmmh
...y

171
~nrm~rc
L,Lyp#U
U.

F . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-ISELECT

i . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EF =[a_m

: jack number 01

laE[

: jack number 32

CD=

El

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

[iTim : on CO 01
_ mm

:onCO12

Description
The Outside line mode can be set to the Normal mode, Direct In Line (DIL)
mode or the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) mode during the day or night mode.
l Normal mode
Enables outside line incoming calls to be received to assigned extension.
l Direct In Line (D!L) mode
Enables all outside line incoming calls to be directed to a specific extension phone
(e.g., the assigned operator extension)
By programming an outside line to the jack number of the corresponding extension
phone, all incoming calls on that outside line will be received at the assigned
extension phone. The call can be accepted by simply picking up the receiver.
l Direct Inward System Access (DISA) mode
Enables outside line incoming calls to be directed to an extension phone by
designating it or to an outside line through KX-T123211.
Programming of Direct Inward System Access on page 3-42 is necessary.
3-57

Programming
H Selecting the Normal mode or the DISA mode
1.

H Selecting

1. 0 Dial (51) for day mode.

Dial (51) for day mode.

CO Day/Mode wiJ( be displayed.

CO Day/Mode will be displayed.

0 Dial (52) for night mode.

0 Dial (52) for night mode.

CO Night/Mode will be displayed.

CO Night/Mode will be- displayed.


2. Press the NEXT button.

2. Press the NEXT button.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO


(01 through

number (01 through

12).

CO 01 : Normal will be displayed

4. Press the SELECT button until


the DIL mode is displayed.

the Normal or DISA mode is displayed.

CO 01 : DIL : Jack- will be displayed.

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

5. Dial the jack number (01 through


6. Press the MEMORY

to the next CO number,

l To return to the previous

CO number,

7.

press the PREV button.


l To go to the desired

32).

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

press the NEXT button.

to the next CO number,

To return to the previous

CO number,

press the PREV button.

the CO number.

To go to the desired

CO number,

press the SELECT button and then dial

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the

the CO number.

of the other CO numbers.

8. To return to the initial program

To advance

press the NEXT button.

CO number,

press the SELECT button and then dial

assignment

and

Normal will blink.

4. Press the SELECT button until

6. l To advance

12).

CO 01 : Normal will be displayed

and

Normal will blink.

5. Press the MEMORY

CO NO ? --)I will be displayed.

CO NO ? + will be displayed.

number

the DIL mode

8. Repeat steps 4 to 7, to program

mode, press

the END button.

assignment

of the other CO numbers.

9. To return to the initial program


the END button.

Programming Table
See page 7-22.

3-58

the

mode, press

Example:
l Company

XYZ would like incoming

to be received

by operators

calls from Central

Office During the day mode

1 and 2.

Operator

1 has been connected

to jack number 01.

Operator

2 has been connected

to jack number 02.

KX-Tl23211

Line

mm(

2.

( ~

or

j?GIiGj

) lsELECTl m

lnnEMoRv.*.

....

Extension jack number 01 only has been set


to receive all incoming calls through CO 02.

3.

( Ej

or

j5iGA

) IsELECTl lo

lUEMoRV e.. . . .

Extension jack number 02 only has been set


to receive all incoming calls through CO 03.

4.

( m

or

jGiIi%A

1041 ) lsELECTl Ia

5.

lNFXTl or

Extension jack number 01 only has been set


to receive all incoming calls through CO 01.

1.

)lsELECTlmm....

Extension jack number 02 only has been set


receive all incoming calls through CO 04.

IhnEMoRVI
. . . . . . to

lENal

3-59

:.......................until

the desired

CO number

until the desired

_.......................................

12) appears.

(01 through

1.5sec

time appears

_e_;<

2.5 set
3.5 set .... ... .. ... ... .. ...default

(all 12 &Os)

4.5 set

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

Description
The KX-T123211 may require a pause time to
access Central Office Line or computer

5. Press the MEMORY

accessed

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

line.
The pause time may be changed

to 1.5sec,

6. e To advance

2.5sec, 3.5sec or4.5sec.

to the next CO number,

press the NEXT button.


l To return to the previous

Programming

CO number,

press the PREV button

1. Dial (53).

l To go to the desired

CO number,

press the SELECT button and then dial the

Pause Time will be displayed.

CO number.
2. Press the NEXT button.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the
CO NO ? + will be displayed.

assignment

of the other CO numbers.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number


(01 through

8. To return

12).

to the initial

the END button.


CO 01 : 3.5secwill
will

be displayed

and 3.5sec

blink.

4. Repeat
desired

pressing

Programming Table i
the SELECT

See page 7-23.

button until the

time (1.5sec, 2.5sec, 3.5sec

4.5sec) is

displayed.

3-60

program

mode,

press

:~~~~~~..........- until the desired

CO number

(01 through

until the desired

12) appears

flash timing appears

300ms
600ms .. ... default

(all 12 COs)

900ms
1200ms

n.................................

onC0

12

Description
The timing of the hookswitch
be within the requirements

6. l To advance

flash signal must


from your Central

Office. There are four choices

available

to the next CO number,

press the NEXT button.


0 To return to the previous

0.3, 0.6,

CO number,

press the PREV button.

0.9, or 1.2second.

0 To go to the desired

CO number,

press the SELECT button and then dial the


CO number.

Programming
1. Dial

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to set the hookswitch


(54).

timing of the other COs.

Flash Time Set will be displayed.


6. To return to the initial program
2. Press the NEXTbutton.
CO NO ?+

the END button.

will be displayed.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number


(01 through

12).

Example:

CO 01 : 600ms will be displayed

and

0.3 set on al I 12 COs =

600ms will blink.


4. Repeat pressing
desired

the SELECT button until the

value is displayed.

5. Press the MEMORY

Programming Table

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

See page 7-23.

3-61

mode, press

. . .. . until the desired CO number (01 through

:..........,..................

.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB=

q q
q m:
14

:.

Is]
:

12) appears

: Disable
under 5m seconds r :
: 62m seconds

17]:70

&m

default (all 12 COs)

:6,4

See the CPC Signal Detect Time table


I

:. ............

until the desired detect time appears

i ...................................

El

q
Description
To detect that an outside party has hung up and
then terminated the outside line (after a
conversation, conference etc.) a CPC signal is
needed. CPC signal detection time can be
removed or changed at customers request.

Programming
1. Dial (55).
CPC Detection will be displayed.

1m:onCO12

5. Press the MEMORY button.


Thn
c?n bill
dnn
hlinkinn
I I IU ILVY
111vrup
ill 11\11
3.
6. 0 To advance to the next CO number, press
the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous CO number, press
the PREV button.
l To go to the desired CO nu:mber, press the
SELECT button and then dial the CO
number.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the detect
time of the other CO number.

2. Press the NEXT button.


CO NO? -.I will be displayed.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the CO number
(01 through 12).
CO 01 : N=42 will be displayed and 42
will blink.
4. Dial the CPC Signal Detect Time number
01, 06 through 75).

: to assign the same on all 12 COs

(00,

8. To return to the initial program mode, press the


END button.
~--I---:-_

T-L,,

rruyrarrlrrllrly
IdUlt:

See page 7-23.

Conditions
0 CPC Signal Detect Time number 02 through
05 can not be used.

CPC Signal Detect Time

No.

DetectTime (m set)

No.

Detect Time (m set)

00

Disable

40

334

01

under 5

41

342

02through 05

can not use

42

350 (default)

06

62

43

358

07

70

44

366

08

78

45

374

09

86

10

94

11

102

48

398

12

110

49

406

13

118

14

126

51

422

15

134

52

430

16

142

I
I
I
I

46

47

50

53

414

17

150

54

446

18

158

55

454

19

166

20

174

57

470

21

182

58

478

22

190

23

198

60

494

24

206

61

502

25

214

26

222

27

230

64

526

28

238

65

534

29

246

30

254

67

550

31

262

68

558

32

270

33

278

69
70

566
574

34

286

71

582

35

294

36

302

37

310

38

318

39

I
I
I
I
I

I
I

326

3 - 63

56

59

62
63

66

72

I
I
I
I

510
518

590

73

598

74

606

75

614

Extension Feature

;.......

until the desired

jack number

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A=

i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..-

:extension

group 1

:extension

group 8

r;;l

,JB=

department

of extension

numbers

or floor by all extension

into a maximum

of 8 separate

/IFI

: on jack number 01

13121

: on jack number 32

(all 32 jacks)

page 4-25), Call Hunting

numbers

6. l To advance to the next jack number,


press the NEXT button.
o To return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired jack number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
jack number.

groups.
Group (on

(on page 3-15)

and

Dial Call Pickup (on page 4-l 1) functions.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the


assignment of the other jack numbers.

Programming
1. Dial (60).
Extension

button.

The LCD will stop blinking.

by

extension

Each group has access to the Paging

8. To return to the initial program


the END button.

Group will be displayed.

l When you dial Y instead

Jack NO ? + will be displayed.

of pressing

the

NEXT button at step 3, in case all of 32 jack


numbers

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack


(01 through

mode, press

Conditions

2. Press the NEXT button.

#Ol
L

default

5. Press the MEMORY

grouping

number

__

: to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

Description
Enables

(01 through 32) appears.

extension

32 ).

have been programmed

to

group 1, # *:EXT GRP-1 will be

displayed.

: EXT GRP-1 will be displayed.

In case each of 32 jack numbers has been

jack number

programmed from extension group 1 to


4. Dial the extension
(1 through

extension group 8, #

group number

displayed.

8).

Programming Table
See page 7-25.
3-66

*: Mixed will be

,.........
__
_______
_----------------until

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . C=

the desired

111 : service
: service

i.. . . . . . . . .

. . . . .. .. ..

(-0

El

I
selected

extensions

can help eliminate

: on jack number 01

~~~~

: on jack number 32

from making

telephone

abuse

and contribute to saving telephone costs.


There are eight service

classes

available

for each

extension.
Area Type Selection

on page 3-18 should be set.

To allow or deny dialing

an Operator

Operator

Class on page 3-19.

Call-Boundary

(all 32 jacks)

32) appears.

class 8

mr[

long distance calls during the day or night mode.


Toll restriction

class 1 --_.- default

(01 through

: to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

Description
Used to prohibit

jack number

Call, see CO

3-67

Service

Class Selections

Programming

1. 0 Dial (61) for day mode.

Denied

Allowed

Day Toll Restrct will be displayed.


all calls

0 Dial (62) for night mode.


2.

ltoil calls
llocal calls (charged)
llocal calls

linternational

3.

lselected area codes


llocal calls (charged)
llocal calls

linternational calls
lany calls other than
specific

calls

Nig Toll Restrct will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


Jack NO ? + will be displayed.

area code

programmed

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack number


linternational

llocal calls (charged)


llocal calls

4.

calls

(01 through
#Ol

linternational

lselected

exchange
codes (charged)

5.

x
blink.

calls

atoll calls
specific

exchange

(charged)

codes

calls

linternational

lany calls other than


exchange

@selected

button.

calls

6. l To advance

exchange

to the next jack number,

press the NEXT button.

codes

0 To return to the previous


all calls

8.

8).

The LCD will stop blinking.

atoll calls
llocal calls (charged)

codes programmed
I

and 1 will

class number (1 through

5. Press the MEMORY

llocal calls (charged)

specific

will be displayed

jack number

4. Press the service

programmed

linternational
atoll calls

llocal calls

7.

: Class-l

lany calls other than

llocal calls

6.

32 ).

atoll calls

jack number,

press the PREV button.


0 To go to the desired

For service class 3, up to 20 area codes can be


selected for use in toll dialing. See Area Code
Entry for Class 3 on page 3-22.

jack number,

press the SELECT button and then dial the


jack number.

For service class 5, up to 20 exchange codes


(charged) can be selected for use in local dialing
(charged). See Exchange Code Entry for
Class 5 on page 3-23.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the assignment

For service class 7, up to 20 exchange codes


can be selected for no use in local dialing.
See Exchange Code Entry for Class 7 on
page 3-24.

8. To return to the initial program

For an area that


exchange code,
selected for use
Exchange Code

on the other jack numbers.

press the END button.

uses Area code type as the


up to 20 exchange codes can be
in local dialing. See Allowable
Selection on page 3-21.

Programming Table
See pages 7-25 and 7-26.
3-68

mode,

i...-

until the desired

.........................

Dial

jack number (01 through 32) appears

(Othrough

:. ...................................

;. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 0

AB

Description

3c

ore)

until the desired

can be programmed

will be displayed
intercom

letter appears

= mk[

: jack number 01

[-El:

jack number 32

Each extension

receiving

9,

by name and

Display

on the display when making or

Dial

Press the SELECT button

calls.

Programming
1. Dial (63).
Extension

Name will be displayed.

. 2. Press the NEXT button.


Jack NO ? + will be displayed.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial jack number
(01 through 32).
SO1 :
will be displayed.
x

jack number

4. To program the-extension
name,
0 Dial (0 through 9, * or #)
@ Press the SELECT button until the desired
letter appears.
@ Repeat steps @ and 0, to program the
desired name.

%&@()

<

>

5. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the other


extension names of jack numbers.

6. l To advance to the next jack number,


press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired jack number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
jack number.

8. To return to the initial program


END button.

3-69

mode, press the

Conditions
l To erase all letters,

press the CLEAR button.

m
button.
l To erase one letter, press the
l The maximum numbers of letters can not exceed

ten.

Example:
l To program

jack number 01 for _~~~ Mr.Brown

Display

1. m1NEXi1m

2. Dial (2).

_...............................................................

B7 I

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. a01 :

Br 1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a01 :

7. Press the SELECT button six times.

6. Dial (9).

Br6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I #Ol :

_...............................................................

9. Press the SELECT button two times.

10. Dial (6).

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . {#Ol :

5. Press the SELECT button four times.

6. Dial (6).

21

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . #Ol :

3. Press the SELECT button three times.

4. Dial (7).

I a01 :

I #Ol :

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. tio1 :

Bro9 1

Brow

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . #Ol :

Brow6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. #Ol :

Brown

11. Press the SELECT

button four times.

.
There is a phone number directory

on page 7-l

3-70

;............

until the desired


i.......................

jack number

(01 through

32)appears.

until the desired mode appears


Option
.-.=*..... default(all 32 jack numbers)
Forced
J

:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

: to assign the same on at132 jack numbers

Description

5. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

This feature gives each message of the SMDR


to an account code of the called or calling party.
This feature has two modes Forced and
Option .In the Forced mode, the account
code must be entered every time extension
user dials.
In the Option mode, the account code may
be entered when a record is needed. Refer to
Account Code page 4-46.

6. l To advance to the next jack number,


press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired jack number,
press the SELECT button and then dial
the jack number.
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the account
code of the other jack numbers.

Programming
1. Dial (64).
Call Accounting

8. To return to the initial program


the END button.

will be displayed.

Programming Table

2. Press the NEXT button.


*Jack NO?+ will be displayed.

See page 7-26.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack


number (01 through 32).
WOl : Option will be displayed and the
x
jack number
Option will blink.
4. Press the SELECT button to alternate
between Option and Forced to select
the desired mode.

3-71

mode, press

:......................-unti

I the desired

.............................

jack number (01 through 32) appears

until the desired


Disable
Enable

AB=

El

mode appears

..... ..-....defaul t (all 32 jack numbers)


I

: to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

mm

: on jack number 01

]~j~[

: on jack number 32

Description
7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 to program the
assignment of the other jack numbers.

Call Forwarding To Outside Line (on page


4-29) enable for each extension.

8. To return to the initial program


press the END button.

Programming

mode,

1. Dial (66).

CO Forward will be displayed.

Programming Table

2. Press the NEXT button.


Jack NO ? + will be displayed.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack number
( 01 through 32 ).
WI1 : Disable will be displayed and Disable
-c_
jack number

See page 7-27.

will blink.
4. Press the SELECT button to alternate between
Enable and Disable to select the desired
mode.
5. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
6. l To advance to the next jack number,
press the NEXT button.
l To return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
l To go to the desired jack number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
jack number.

3-73

:...............-

............ until the desired

i.. ...........................

jack number (01 through

until the desired


Disable
Enable

32) appears

mode appears

.......... ..default(al I 32 jack numbers)


I

: to assign the same on all 32.jack numbers

Description
This feature can call to the extension
the Do Not Disturb by programming.
Refer to Do Not Disturb

Override

that is setting

7. Repeat steps 4 to 6, to program the


assignment of the other jack numbers.

on page 4-32.
6. To return to the initial program
press the END button.

Programming
1. Dial (68).
DND Override

mode,

will be displayed.

Conditions

2. Press the NEXT button.


Jack NO ? + will be displayed.

This feature allows you to ring an extension


set for the Do Not Disturb mode.

3. Press the NEXT button or dial the jack


number (01 through 32 ).
SO1 : Disable will be displayed and Disable
x
jack number

Programming Table
See page 7-28.

will blink.
4. Press the SELECT button to alternate
between Enable and Disable to select the
desired mode.
5. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
6. lTo advance to the next jack number,
press the NEXT button.
lTo return to the previous jack number,
press the PREV button.
lTo go to the desired jack number,
press the SELECT button and then dial the
jack number.
3-75

that is

Doorphone Feature

_........................,............
until the desired

,...............................,...................

doorphone

number (1 or 2) appears

until the desired

jack number appears

: on jack number 01

: on jack number 32

: to assign the same on all 32 jacks

. . ;) until the desired

mode appears

-------ea.default (all 32 jack numbers)

Description

6. Press the MEMORY

Allows each extension to be programmed for


receiving calls from up to 2 doorphones during
the day or night mode.
(Doorphone

The LCD will stop blinking.


7. l To advance

is an option.)
l

Day

Door Phone

will be displayed.

l Dial (71) for night

mode.
Night Door Phone will be displayed.

.2. Press the NEXT button.


Door NO ? + will be displayed.
3. Press the NEXT button or dial the doorphone
number (1 or 2).
DP-1:~Enable
will be displayed.
jack number

button until the


4. Repeat pressing the m
desired jack number appears, or press the
button and then dial the jack number.

to the next jack number,

press the m

Programming
1. l Dial (70) for day mode.

button.

To return to the previous


press the m

button.

To go to the desired
press the

jack number,

button and then dial the

jack number.
6. Repeat steps 5 to 7, to program the assignment
of the other jack numbers.
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8, to program the assignment
of the another doorphone.
10. To return to the initial program
END button.

5. Press the SELECT button to alternate between


Enable and Disable to select the desired
mode.

jack number,

button.

Programming Table
See pages 7-28 and 7-29.

mode, press the

..........................

until

the

desired

Hold-l

mode

appears

......... ..Flas h hookswitch

Hold_2.. ......... Flash hookswitch

and dial 20

Programming

Description

1. Dial (91)

If the following happens frequently with a standard


telephone, program the HOLD MODE 2.
l Nobody answers when you receive a call.
0 A CO line is busy although nobody is using
the line.
l The Trunk (CO) Indicator of the system unit
does not turn off even after you hang up.
If a call is not terminated reliably after you hang up,
the above-mentioned cases are caused. To avoid
these problems, program the HOLD MODE 2. Every
call will be terminated reliably except those calls that
you dialed 20 after flashing the hook-switch in this
mode.
The following operation
Hold-2 mode is set.

only ....................... ... default

is changed

Option

1 will be displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


Hold-l will be displayed

and blink.

3. Press the SELECT button to alternate


between Hold-l and Hold-2 to select
the desired mode.
4. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.
5. To return to the initial program
the END button.

when

Programming Table
See page 7-29.

Call Park (on page 5-4)


Call on Hold (on page 5-4)
Conference
(on page 5-5)
Call Waiting (on page 5-5)
Call Splitting (oripage 5-6)
Call Transfer (on page 5-6)
Paging And Transfer (on page 5-8)
External Feature Access (on page 5-9)
Account Code (on page 5-10)

3-77

mode, press

l All Parameters
0 System Parameter
l Speed Dial

~........................................

bIE[

l CO

Para ... ... . ... .. ... default


Para
Para
Para
Para
Dial

All
System
co
EXT
DSS
Speed

ISELECTI IMEMORY
t

until the desired mode appears

@iiiil

Parameter (Outside)
:.................... until the CO Para appears
: to assign the same on all 12 COs

99 NEXT SELECT MEMORY


O~~nlQLgn

AB

MEMORY

END

Extension Parameter
:....................-until

the EXT Para appears

;.. AB=

99 NEXT SELECT
MEMORY
OlIIIOlcjl~O

AB

mr[

: on>ack number 01

mE[

: on jack number 32

MEMORY

END

l DSS

: to assign the same on all 32 jack numbers

Parameter
:......................unti

I the DSS Para appears


........

A= @

: to assign the same on both DSSs

1 :onDSSl
Cl
q2 :onDSS2

3-78

Description

Extension parameters

The system Data features

Extension

are preset as the default

Service

data of the programming.


All

Class Assignment

of Toll

Restriction

parameters

Extension

System parameters

Account

CO parameters
Extension

Group Assignment

Name
Code Input Mode

Call Transfer

parameters

to Outside

Call Forwarding

DSS parameters

Executive

Speed dial

Line

to Outside

Override

Line

Do not Disturb Override

System parameters
Extension

Number Assignment

Operator

One Touch Access for System Features

Assignment

Paired Telephone

CO Line Ringing

Assignment

for

Selection

Auto CO Hunting

DSS Console

Automatic

Automatic

CO Hold Using DSS Button

Flexible

Day/Night

Service

Intercom

Mode

Answering

Selection

CO Button
Voice Alerting

Mode

Call Hunting

Background

Toll Restriction

Station Number

Hold Time Reminder

F3 -One Touch Button Mode Selection

Hold Recall Time Set

Call waiting

Transfer

Check

Tone Selection

Recall Time

Call Forwarding
Pickup

Music

Starting Time

Call Forwarding

Dial Delay Time

Co-to-Co

Duration

Station Message

Do Not Disturb

Time Limit

Dial Call Pickup Deny

Detail Recording

(SMDR)

Data Line Security

Duration

Time Count Start Mode

Pickup Dial

External

Paging Access Tone

Absent Message

Capability

Call on Hold for Standard Telephone

Call Waiting Tone Deny

Ringing

Flexible

Assignment

of Doorphone

Night Service

Direct Inward System Access

Executive

Off Premise Extension

Station Lock

Off Hook Call Announcement

Timed Reminder

Override

Deny

CO parameters
CO Connection

DSS parameters

Assignment

Dial Mode (DTMF/Pulse/Call


Host PBX Access

DSS button of the DSS Console

Blocking)

Feature button of the DSS Console

Codes Assignment

Trunk Group Assignment


Dialing

Speed dial

Flexible

Outward

Assignment

Flexible

Ringing

Assignment

Delayed

Ringing

Assignment

Speed access codes (00 through


phone numbers

CO Mode Assignment
Pause Time Assignment
Hookswitch
Calling

Flash Timing

Party Control

Disconnect
Automatic

(CPC) Signal

Time
Designated

CO Line Access
3-79

99) in which

are stored may be preset.

Programming
To set Extension Parameter to the default data ;

To set System Parameters, Speed Dial or All


Parameters to the default data ;

1. Dial (99).

1. Dial (99).
System Clear will be displayed.
2. Press the NEXT button.
Menu : All Para will be displayed
All Para will blink.

2. Press the NEXT button.


3. Repeat pressing the SELECTbutton
EXT Para is displayed.

and

until the

4. Press the MEMORY button.


Jack NO ? + is displayed.

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the


desired data mode is displayed.
4. Press the MEMORY button.
The LCD will stop blinking.

5. Dial the jack number. (01 through 32)


When dialing (Ol),
Jack NO ? + 01 will be displayed.

5. Repeat steps 3 to 4, to clear the other system


data.

6. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking..

To set CO Parameter to the default data ;

7. Repeat steps 5 to 6, to clear the other extension


parameter.

1. Dial (99).
To set DSS Parameter to the default data ;
2. Press the NEXT button.

1. Dial (99).

3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the


CO Para is displayed.

2. Press the NEXT button.


3. Repeat pressing the SELECT button until the
DSS Para is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY button.


CO NO ?+ is displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY button.


DSS NO ? + is displayed.

5. Dial the CO number (01 through 12).


When dialing (Ol),
CO NO ? + 01 will be displayed.

5. Dial the DSS number (1 or 2).


When dialing (l),
DSS NO ? + 1 will be displayed.

6. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

6. Press the MEMORY button.


The LCD will stop blinking.

7. Repeat steps 5 to 6, to clear the other CO


parameter.
-

7. Repeat steps 5 to 6, to clear the another DSS


parameter.

After completing clearing, and to return to the


initial mode ;
1. Press the END button.

3-80

When you connect


KX-T30830,

EMSS PROPRIETARY

KX-T30825,

KX-T30820

TELEPHONE

or KX-T30850)

(KX-T61631,

KX-T61630,

to the KX-T123211

KX-T61620,

KX-T61650,

system, change the programming

of CO

button or DSS button to have them operate properly.


The default

of CO button or DSS button is assigned

l In case of KX-T61631,

CO
CO
CO
CO
CO
1 CO

button
button
button
button
button
button

on
on
on
on
on
on

KX-T61630,

which
which
which
which
which
which

COl
CO2
C03
C04
CO5
CO6

l In case of KX-T30830,

is
is
is
is
is
is

KX-T61620

printed
printed
printed
printed
printed
printed

KX-T30825,

KX-T30820

CO button on which COl is printed


CO button on which CO2 is printed
CO button on which CO3 is printed
l In case of KX-T30830

DSS
DSS
DSS
DSS
DSS
DSS
DSS
_DSS
Change

button
button
button
button
button
button
button
button

on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on

the default

as following.

and KX-T61650,
CO1
CO2
CO3
CO4
CO5
CO6

Line
Line
Line
Line
Line
Line

and KX-T30850,
CO1 Line
CO2 Line
CO3 Line

only,

which
which
which
which
which
which
which
which

DSSll
DSS12
DSS13
DSSl4
DSS15
DSS16
DSS17
DSS18

is
is
is
is
is
is
is
is

printed
printed
printed
printed
printed
printed
printed
printed

<Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension

of CO button or DSS button by the programming

Button.
Flexible
To
To
To
To
To
To
Flexible

CO Button
change
assign
change
change
change
change

no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.

into other CO button on page 4-57


into trunk group access button on page 4-571
into DSS button on page 4-58
into one touch dialing button on page 4-58
into message waiting buttonon page 4-59
into other all CO button on page 4-59

DSS Button (KX-T30830

only).

To change into other DSS button on page 4-61


To change into one touch dialing buttonon page 4-61
To change into message waiting button on page 4-62

3-81

of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of

Jack
Jack
Jack
Jack
Jack
Jack
Jack
Jack

no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.
no.

of Flexible

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
CO Button or Flexible

DSS

Examples
The outside lines of KX-T123211 is connected 8 COs from Central Office (CO).
Extension No 105 (Jack No. 05) is set up beforehand by System Programming
System Programming
Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment
(Both Day and Night Mode)
Flexible Ringing Assignment
(Both Day and Night Mode)

CO1
CO8
CO1
CO8

as followings.

through CO7 are Enable


is Disable.
through CO7 are Enable
is Disable.

r Trunk Group 1 : COl,

C02, CO3

If you connect KX-T30820 at Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) and set the CO button of KX-T30820
Outgoing calls and Incoming calls in Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) are operated as followings.

as shown in Fig.1,

KX-T123211
KX-T30820

y!g$F-

Fig.

CO Button on which
CO Button on which
CO Button on which

Outgoing

COl is printedCO2 is printedCO3 is printed

Extension

Change

no. 105

CO3 Button.
CO4 Button.
. CO5 Button.

0 To change into other CO Button, see


page To change into other CO
button on page 4-57.

calls:
t Access CO3 Line
. Access CO4 Line
. Access CO5 Line

Pressing
Pressing
Pressing

CO3 Button
CO4 Button
CO5 Button

Dialing

FIrI

(Trunk group 1)

. Access only CO3 Line

Dialing

mm

(Trunk group 2)

. Access

Dialing

mm

(Trunk group 3)

You cannot dial through

Incoming

only CO4 and CO5 Lines

No access CO Line

CO1 Line, CO2 Line and CO6 Line through

CO8 Line

calls:

l The calls which

reaches through the CO3 Line through CO5 Line can be received.
reaches through the CO1 Line, CO2 Line, CO6 Line through CO8 Line can not be received
but can be received with Directed Call Pickup or Direct Inward System Access.

l The calls which

1The CO Line which is not assigned

to the CO Button cannot be dialed

or received.

If you connect KX-T30820 at Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) and set the CO button of KX-T30820 as shown in Fig.
2, Outgoing calls and Incoming calls in Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) are operated as followings.

CO Button on which COl


CO Button on which CO2
CO Button on which CO3
l See page To assign

Change
CO Button
is printed F
CO Button
is printed CO Button
is printed w
into trunk group access button

which can access to Trunk group 1


which can access to Trunk group 2
which can access to Trunk group 3
on page 4-57.

Outgoing calls:
Pressing CO Button which can access to Trunk group 1 Pressing CO Button which can access to Trunk group 2Pressing CO Button which can access to Trunk group 3Dialing

mm

Dialing

p[

Dialing

Fi

Access CO1 Line through


Access CO4 Line through
Access only CO7 Line

Access

CO1 Line through

CO3 Line

(Trunk Group 2)

b Access

CO4 Line through

CO6 Line

(Trunk Group 3)

+ Access

only CO7 Line

(Trunk Group 1)

CO3 Line
CO6 Line

lYOU cannot dial through CO8 Line


Incoming

calls:

l The calls which

reaches

through the CO1 Line through

CO7 Line can be received.

l The calls which reaches the CO8 Line can not be received but can be received with Directed Call Pickup

or Direct Inward System Access.


,m
If you connect KX-T30820 at Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) and set the CO Button of KX-T30820 as shown in Fig.
3, Outgoing calls and Incoming calls in Extension 105 (Jack No. 05) are operated as followings.
KX-T123211

CO Button on which
CO Button on which
CO Button on which

l See page To change

Change

CO Button which can access to Trunk group 1


CO4 Button
CO Button which can access to other all CO Line
(which are not assigned to CO button)
into other all CO button on page 4-59.

COl is printedCO2 is printedCO3 is printed-

Outgoing calls
Access CO1 Line through CO3 Line
l Pressing CO Button which can access to Trunk group 1 *
Access
CO4 Line
l Pressing CO4 Button
l Pressing CO Button which can access to other all CO Line -Access
CO5 Line through CO7 Line
l Dialing

mr\

(Trunk Group 1)

t Access

CO1 Line through

CO3 Line

l Dialing

l?lp[

(Trunk Group 2)

. Access

CO4 Line through

CO6 Line

l Dialing

F\

(Trunk Group 3)

. Access only CO7 Line

pl

l You cannot dial through

Incoming

CO8 Line

calls:

l The calls which


l The calls which

reaches through the CO1 Line through CO7 Line can be received.
reaches the CO8 Line can not be received.
3-83

OPERATION
(KX-T123235,
KY-TM

.\I\-

To operate
( Electronic

OF EMSS PROPRlE.TARY TELEPYONES

KX-T123230,

KY_TRnARn
,c;r;n
,
,.I. . w-w,

KY_TM
,\I\_,

I I cm
fi.

KX-T123220,

KX-T123250,

KY-TRnR35
. . . . . ..W_,

KX-T61631,

KY-TRnnm
..I. . V-r,

KX-T61630,

KY-TRnElm
..I. . ,

this system, after making program changes, set the System Program Switch located
Modular Switching System ) to the SET position.

on the KX-T12321i

Making Calls
When the unit is unused,

Liquid

Crystal Display will show the month, day and the present time.
_

-..

Hands-free

Using the Handset

Lift
handset

Dial
extension
number
(100 through

Talk

Press
SP-PHONE

Hang up

Dial
extension
number
(100 through

199)

l You may press the ICM (Intercom)

When changing

-,

button instead of the first SP-PHONE

Talk
SP-PHONE
199)

button.

CO button into DSS (Direct Station Selection) button ;


l For changing,

see Flexible

CO Button on page 4-57.

Press CO
which has
been changed
into DSS

Lifthandset
or press
SP-PHONE

Conditions

Description
Station to station dialing

l The extension

within the KX-T123211

programming,

system.

number

is set below. Through

you may change

number to other number.See

Operation

the extension

the page 3-8.

Default;

Using the handset

101 : is assigned

to extension

of jack number 01

[; 132 : is assigned

to extension

of jack number 32

1. Lift the handset.


2. Dial the extension

number

(100 through

199).

3. Start talking

4. Hang up upon completion

of the conversation.

Hands-free
1. Press the SP-PHONE
2. Dial the extension

or ICM button.

number

(100 through

the called

199).

3. Start talking
4. Press the SP-PHONE
completion
When changing

The extension number of the calling party will


be displayed on the LCD of the KX-T123230
KX-T123235 / KX-T61630 / KX-T30830 / KX-T61631.

The ICM indicator

button again after

CO button into DSS (Direct Station

party.

of the conversation.

willbe

lit green while-using

the unit.

Selection) button ;
1. Lift the handset

When a called party has the KX-T123230 1


KX-T123235 / KX-T61631 / KX-T6j 630 / KX-T30830
equipped with an LCD, the extension number of
the calling party will be displayed on the LCD Of

or press the SP-PHONE

0 The KX-T123250,

button.

will not function

2. Press the CO button which has been changed

KX-T61650
for hands-free

or KX-T30850
mode

but can hear the other partys voice in the

into DSS.

on-hook
4-l

mode.

n Automatic

Line Access

Individual

Line Access

Usingthe Handset

Dial 9

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Wait for C.O.


dial tone

Lift

-.

-:
Press
co

handset

Dial
phone
number

Talk

I
I
Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Dial phone
number

Talk

Wait for
C.O. dial tone

Hang up

Hands-free

Description
Each extension

can automatically

select an
Press
co

idle line within the CO line enable to call.

Wait for
C.O. dial tone

Dial phone
number

Operation
1. Lift the handset
button.

or press the SP-PHONE

Talk

2. Dial (9).
Dial tone from CO (Central Office) will be
heard.
l The CO indicator will be lit green at your
extension

Press
SP-PHONE

Description
Any of the 12 COs may be directly

and lit red at other extensions.

selected.

Operation

3. Dial the phone number.


4. Start talking.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button
upon completion of the conversation.

Using the handset


1. Lift the handset.
2. Press the CO button.
Dial tone from CO will be heard.
3. Dial the phone number.
4. Start talking.
5. Hang up.
Hands-free

Conditions

n The

9 dialed, will be displayed on the LCD


of the KX-T123230 / KX-T123235 / KX-T61631 /
KX-T61630 / KX-T30830 and you will hear
following.

1. Press the CO button.


Dial tone from CO will be heard.
2. Dial the phone number.
3. Start talking.

Dial tone from the CO : indicates that the


CO line is captured.
Busy tone : indicates that all the CO lines
are busy.
Reorder tone : indicates that the extension
is denied access to any
outside lines.

4. Press the SP-PHONE

button.

The phone number dialed will be displayed


on the LCD of the KX-T123230 / KX-T123235 /
KX-T61631 / KX-761630 / KX-T30830.
You can not use the CO button whose
indicator is lit (red) as this CO line is use.
The KX-Tl23250,
KX-T61650 or
KX-T30850 will not function for hands-free
mode but can hear the other partys voice in
the on-hook mode.
4-2

1 Individual

Trunk Group Access

Dial 8

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Wait for
C.O.
dial tone

Dial
phone
number

Talk

Dial trunk
group number
(1 through 8)

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang up
handset or
Press
SP-PHONE

Press AUTO

Dial speed
access code
(00 through 99)

Description
There are 100 memory locations of system
speed dialing available. A maximum of each
memory location is 32 digits.
For programming, refer to System Speed
Dialing Entry on page 3-5.

BYOU may press the CO button instead of dialing


8 and trunk group number (1 through 8). In this
case, you must assign the trunk group access
number to the CO button.
To assign, see Flexible CO button on page
4-57.

Operation
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

Description

button.
2. Press the AUTO button.
3. Dial the speed access code (00 through 99).
o You may press the CO button to select the
CO line directly after lifting the handset or
press the SP-PHONE button.

Each extension can automatically


select an idle
CO line within the same trunk group. Through
programming,
12 CO lines can be divided up to 8
groups. See the page 3-52.

Operation
1. Lift the handset

2.

3.
4.
5.

or press the SP-PHONE


button.
Dial (8) and the trunk group number (1 through
8) or press the CO button,which
is changed into
trunk group access number.
Dial tone from the CO (Central Office) will be
heard.
Dial the phone number.
Start talking.
Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

Conditions
e The dialed number will be displayed

on the
LCD of the KX-T123230 / KX-T123235 /
KX-T61631 / KX-T61630 / KX-T30830.
l Continuous use of speed dialing is possible.
ex. [AUTO] [0] [0] [AUTO] [0] [l]
Chaining together two or more memory
locations.
l Combinations
of speed dialing, one touch
dialing and manual dialing is possible.

Conditions
l The CO line which

is not assigned to the CO


Button cannot be dialed.
l The CO lines that is assigned to the trunk
group are set below.
Default;
CO 1 is assigned to Trunk group 1.
CO 2 is assigned to Trunk group 2.
CO 3 is assigned to Trunk group 3.
CO 4 is assigned to Trunk group 4.
CO 5 is assigned to Trunk group 5.
CO 6 is assigned to Trunk group 6.
CO 7 is assigned to Trunk group 7.
CO 8 through CO 12 are assigned to
Trunk group 8.

n Each extension can access a new


CO line without hanging up.
While having a conversation,
l The original
Press
another CO

conversation will be
terminated and a new CO line
will be accessed.
4-3

l Be sure the handset


l Set the MEMORY

is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE

switch of the Proprietary

telephone

or MONITOR

button is OFF.

to PROGRAM.

n Storage

When the MEMORY


heard.
l two beeps _

l You may dial 81 through

l one beep

Dial
phone
number

Dial 9

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

beep will be

The entry is the same as what was


previously stored.
The entry is different from the one
that was previously stored.
Repeat the procedure of
programming.

.....

Press
MEMORY

88 instead of 9 .

9 - - - An extension automatically

button is pressedia

n To Erase after Programming

selects an idle line

within the CO line enable to call.


81 through

88 - - - An extension selects a trunk


group designated.

19or 81 through

88 must be dialed for storage.

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

l The TRANSFER

W To Correct an Error while Proarammina

l After pressing

Press
MEMORY

button is used as the CLEAR

button.

TRANSFER

/[

Press
CLEAR
(TRANSFER)

I
Press
CLEAR
(TRANSFER)
instead of
MEMORY

reprogram

the CLEAR button,

the correct

l The TRANSFER

number.

After programming
MEMORY

all the numbers,

return the

switch to the SET position.

button is used as

the CLEAR button.

W To Change a Stored Number


Repeat Storage

above.

Lift
or press
SP-PHONE

n To Confirm a Stored Number

Repeat programming

the same number

n You

into the same

station.

Description
-.
.^

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

may press the CO button to select the CO

line directly

after lifting the handset or pressing

SP-PHONE

button.

l For your convenience,

program private
phone numbers into the KX-T123230,
KX-Tl23235, KX-T123220, KX-T123250,
.
etc.

.
..
,
.. I. I.
I nere are 12 memory iocatrons ror auromartc ararrng
available. (KX-T123230, KX-Tl23235, KX-Tl23220,
KX-T61631, KX-T61630, KX-T61620, KX-T30830,
KX-T30820)
There are 3 memory locations for automatic dialing
available. ( KX-T123250,KX-T61650,
KX-T30850 )
Up to 16 digits can be stored into each of the 12 or 3
memory locations. The k, #I, - FLASH,
PAUSE and ICM (Secret) button can be registered
as 1 digit.
4-4

the

Dialing

Programming
Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE or MONITOR button is OFF.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.

1. Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM.


PITS-PGM NO ? + will be displayed.

2. Press a programmable

Conditions

When automatic line access number 9 and


the phone number 123-456-7890 has
been stored, MOl/P : g-123-456- will
be displayed.

Use the +(FWD/DND),


or t(CONF)
button for scrolling the display
from side to
,
side.
The dialed

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

The combinations of speed dialing, onetouch dialing and manual dialing is possible.
The line access number (9) or trunk group
access number (81 through 88) should be
stored I
Continuous
possible.

The display

9-123[456]

Features that can be accessed by using the


dialing button also can be programmed into
memory.
Refer to One Touch Access for System
Features page 4-52.
when programming.

shows the following

is

When dialing, the pause is automatically


entered after line access number (9) or trunk
group access number (81 through 88) are stored.

press the ICM button

IMOllP:

use of one touch dialing

Example :
[PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE l]
[PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE 21
In this case, programmable
feature button
2 should not include the line access
number or trunk group access number.

Example:

shows the following

phone number will be displayed

on the LCD of the KX-Tl23230 / KX-T123235 /


KX-T61631 / KX-T61630 /KX-T30830. The
dialed phone number can be kept secret by not
being displayed also.

4. Enter the phone number.


You may enter punctuations in a phone
number.
The SAVE button is used as the -I
button.
To erase a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button.
The TRANSFER button is used as the
CLEAR button.
When you dont want to display the dialed
phone number on the LCD in OneTouch
Dialing, press the ICM button before and after
dialing the phone number that you want to
keep secret. Do not press the ICM button before
line access number (9 or 81 through 88).

The display

button.

0 You may press the CO button to select the


CO line directly after lifting the handset or
press the SP-PHONE button.

2. Press a programmable
feature button.
The LCD will show MOl/ P : Not Stored
when nothing is stored in the
programmable
feature button 1.

3. Enter the line access number.


9 : automatic line access number
81: access number of trunk group
82: access number of trunk group
83: access number of trunk group
84: access number of trunk group
85: access number of trunk group
86: access number of trunk group
87: access number of trunk group
88: access number of trunk group

feature

when dialing.

Examples:
Automatic line access number 9 and phone
number 123-4567 into the programmable
feature button ? .
Programming:
Set the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM
position.
Press [PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE l]
Dial
[9] [123-45671
Press [MEMORY]
Return the MEMORY switch to SET
.
position.

1
5. Press the MEMORY button.
The MEMORY indicator will be lit.
6. Repeat steps 2 to 5, to program on other
programmable
feature button.
7. After programming
all the numbers, return
the MEMORY switch to the SET position.
The MEMORY indicator will go out.

Dialing
Lift the handset.
Press [PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE l]
l You may press the CO button to select the
r-n
linn
rlirn,-tl\r call.zl
&tar liftinn
thn
h.nnrlcnt
V
1111-z llb,l)r
IllUlwj
LII-Z IlcLlI*L.
4-5

When a Line is Busy

I1 Setting
For outside

When hearing a recall for camp-on


(trunk) calls

Press
co

When outside-calls

Dial 6

If you will
hear a
busy tone

CoLnrrrmarron
tone of 2 beeps
will be heard

t-rang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

For intercom calls

You will
hear CO
dial tone

When intercom calls

a.. .
. . . . . ..

II
b

Dial
extension
number
(100 through

If you will
hear a
busy tone

Dial 6

Confirmation
tone of 2 beeps
will be heard

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

You will
hear ring
back tone

199)

Description

Conditions

If the extension you have dialed is busy, or

Lifting the handset

outside line (CO line) you have selected is busy,

PHONE button ) during the camp-on

the call will be automatically called back to you

will cause the camp-on

when the extension or the outside line (CO line)

cancelled.

becomes free using this function.


This feature

An extension

is also known as camp-on.

(or pressing

feature

the SPmode

to be

may be the recipient

of more

than one call back busy, the call backs will be

Operation

executed

in the order of their arrival.

Setting
1. Lift the handset

0 If a call back is not answered

or press the SP-PHONE

original

button.
2. For intercom
For outside

calls, dial the extension

extension

88).

3. Dial (6) after a busy tone is heard.


4. Wait for the confirmation

tone.

Example:
Call back CO 01 or Call back Ext 105

Recall for camp - on

will be displayed.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

When hearing a recall for camp-on ;


Lift the handset

or press the SP-PHONE

button.
l When using an intercom

call, you will

hear the ring back tone.


l When using an outside

10 seconds,

call back will be cancelled.

number.

calls, press the CO button or dial

(9 or 81 through

within

call, you will

hear the CO dial tone.


4-7

at the
the

REDIAL

Press
REDIAL

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial
extension
number
(100 through 199)

You will
hear a
busy tone

Dial 1 and
wait for an
answer

Description

Description
The last phone number dialed

If the extension

on an outgoing

can inform

call (CO line) can be redialed.

intercom

Operation

you have dialed

the extension

call is waiting

is busy, you

that another
by three beeps.

If the extension you have dialed is KX-1123235,

1. Lift the handset

you can inform the extension through the speaker.

or press the SP-PHONE

button.

See Off Hook Call Announcement on page 4-23.

2. Press the REDIAL button.

Operation

0 You may press the CO button to select the


CO line directly
pressing

1. Lift the handset

after lifting the handset or

the SP-PHONE

button.

button.

2. Dial the extension

0 You may dial 8 and the trunk group number


(1 through
directly

number.

3. When you will hear a busy tone, dial (1) and

8) to select the trunk group

after lifting the handset or pressing

the SP-PHONE

or press the SP-PHONE

wait for an answer.

button.

Conditions
Conditions

Up to 32 digits can be stored and redialed.

To answer

your signal,

see Call Waiting

on page 4-20.

The $ , cr#7or PAUSE button can be registered

0 If the other party is setting

Call Waiting

as 1 digit.

Tone-From Extension Deny on page 4-43

When using the KX-T123235, one pressing of

or is using a data terminal equipment, you may

the REDIAL button:

not be able to use this feature. A reoder tone

When using the handset; redial once

When using hands-free; redial up to 15

is heard after dialing 1.

times (Automatic Redialing) within


1O-minutes.
To cancel automatic redialing, press the
FLASH button.
When calling

or while

mode, pressing

in the conversation

the REDIAL button will

cause the redial to operate

after about 3

seconds.

4-8

Conditions

into Extension

l If the other party is using data equipment

is set for Executive

or

Override Deny-Extension

on page 4-33, you can not intrude into the other


Lift handset
orpress
SP-PHONE

extension
number
(100 throuoh
i99)
-

hear a busy
tone

A 3-party
c conference is
L now established1

party that is in conversation.


is heard after dialing

2.

into CO
Description
Allows
.

an extension

extension
outside

user to intrude

that is in conversation

into another

or inside party.

For use of this feature, the extension


required

to be set for this feature

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

is

beforehand

or press the SP- PHONE

button.
number.

will now be established.

To terminate conference

the handset

the SP-PHONE
0

back on hook or press

button.

The other two parties will be directly


connected

together

and can converse

each other. (Intercom


outside

with

calls and intercom

to

are OK.)

To terminate one caller and talk to the other


l If the conference

parties are one outside

caller and one extension:


To talk to the outside

party, press the CO

button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

button.
2. Press the CO button on which you want to
intrude.
A 3-party conference is now established.
To terminate conference
Replace the handset back on hook or press the
SP-PHONE button.
0 The other two parties will be directly connected
together and can converse with each other.
(Intercom to outside is OK, outside to outside is
impossible.)
If you want to leave the conference, press the
CONF button instead of SP-PHONE button and
if you want to join the conference again, press
the flashing (in groups of 2) CO button.
To terminate
caller.

button.
To talk to the extension

Press CO
in which you
want to intrud,e.

Operation

3. When you hear a busy tone, dial (2).

Replace

Allows an extention user to intrude into a CO line


in use.
For the use of this feature, the extension is
required to be set for this feature beforehand in
the KX-Ti 23211. For programming, see page
3-74.

Operation

A 3-party conference

A 3-party
conference is now
established.

Description

3-74.

2. Dial the extension

in

the M-T12321 1. For programming, see page

1. Lift the handset

El

with an

A reorder tone

party, press the ICM

one caller and talk to the other

0 To talk to the outside party, press the CO

button.
To talk to the extension
button.

party, press thefCM

Conditions
0 If the other party is setting Data Line Security
on page 4-42, you can not intrude into the
other party that is in conversation.

Receiving Calls

Setting

To cancel

or
Lift
handset

Press
SP-PHONE
be lit)

Operation
Lift the handset
button.

or press the SP-PHONE

l When receiving

an intercom

the ICM button whose indicator


and talk. (Hands-free
l When receiving

an outside

feature

is flashing

call reaches,

Operation

red

mode)

Answering

1. For setting,

press the AUTO ANS button.


The AUTO ANS indicator will be lit.

Selection

(on page 4-56) is selected

Preference-Incoming
outside

Allows an extension user to answer an intercom


call in the automatic hands-free mode without
any operation when receiving an intercom call.

quickly

call, you may press

and talk.(Hands-free

l When the Automatic

is flashing

mode)

the CO button whose indicator


quickly

Description

call, you may press

No Line

in the extension
lift the handset

and

2. For cancellation,
press the AUTO ANS button
again.
The AUTO ANS indicator will go out.

and then

press the CO button whose indicator

is flashing

(red color) quickly.


l When the Automatic

feature

received

Selection

(on page 4-55) is selected

Preference-Incoming
incoming

Conditions
Answering

in the extension

calls from the Central

l This feature

is required to be set beforehand


while the unit is not in use.

Prime Line
and any

l The KX-T123250,

Office are

at the same time except

preferred

will not function

CO

line, you must lift the handset and then press


the CO button whose indicator
color) quickly.

is flashing

(red

Conditions
An extension can not receive the call through the CO
line which is not assigned to the CO button. Therefore,
if the extension user wants to receive the CO call, the
CO line is required to be assigned to the CO button.
To assign the CO line to the CO button, there are 3
ways as follows.
l Way to change

into other CO button

(on page 4-57)


l Way to assign to trunk group access

button

(on page 4-57)


l Way to change

are not assigned

into other all CO numbers


to CO button.(on

which

page 4-59)
4-10

KX-T61650 or KX-T30850
for Automatic Answer.

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial

40

Lift handset
orpress
SP-PHONE

Description

Dial

Dial ringing
extension
number
(100 through 199)

Description

An extension user can answer any ringing


extension within their own extension group.

An extension may answer an incoming call that


is ringing at another extension regardless of
the extension group.

Operation

Operation
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHON E

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.
2. Dial (40) and wait for the confirmation tone.
3. Start talking.

button.
2. Dial (4) and then the extension number
(100 through 199) at which call is ringing
3. Wait for confirmation tone and then start
talking.

Conditions
Dial Call Pickup will work for incoming calls
(intercom, outside and doorphone)
but will not work for camp-on recall and hold
recall.

Conditions
0 It is possible to answer calls outside your
assigned

extension group.
Call Pickup can be used with the
present call placed on hold.

l Directed

If a ringing extension is outside the extension


group or is in the dial call pickup denied
mode, then a reorder tone will be heard
through the use of this feature.
Refer to Extension
on page 3-66.

Example:
Mr Browns extension number is 110.
He is now out of the office.
Mark receives the call instead of Mr Brown
with the telephone on his desk (extension 120).

Group Assignment

Dial Call Pickup can use with the present


call placed on hold.

dial

141and

exte ntion No.

4-11

1 0
III

To park a call

2
cl
ABC

Dial parking
station
number
(20 through 29)

Dial 2

Press
HOLD

If a busy tone is heard after the parking


station number (0 through 9).

station

number

Confirmation
tone

is dialed,

dial only last 1 digit of the other parking

To retrieve a parked call at any extension

5
LJ
JKL

Dial 5

Lift handset

Dial parking
station
number
(20 through 29)

Conditions

Description
Extension

user can place up to ten calls in the park

zones. Allows any extension user to retrieve the parked


call (intercom or outside) at any extension.

l Up to ten calls can be parked.


l If a parked

call is not retrieved

within 3 minutes,
will be sounded

a hold time reminder


at the extension

Operation

the call on hold.

To park a call

There are 9 choices

1. You are in conversation


outside

with an internal

For programming,

Mark is talking

3. Dial (2).
station number

(20 through

29).

see the page 3-25.

with extension

130 on his desk,

and then moves to another room placing

the

call park.

(20).

He resumes the conversation

Call Prked at 20 will be displayed.


l A confirmation

from 1 to 9

Example:

2. Press the HOLD button.

l When dialing

ranging

who placed

minutes for the hold time reminder.

or

party.

4. Dial the parking

by an extension

using another

extension.

tone will be heard.

l If a busy tone is heard, dial only last 1 digit

of the other parking


(0 through

station number

Press the HOLD button,

9).

dial H

5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

To retrieve a parked call at any extension.


1. Lift the handset

, dial

(parking

station number), hang up


and then go to Mr. Jays

or press the SP-PHONE

button at any extension.

office.

Dial (5).
Dial the parking

station number (20 through

on which the call is parked.


Wait for the confirmation

tone and then

29)

Dial 05 and the


parked station number
20 at Mr. Jays office.
0

Description

Calling from Doorphone

A different

ringing

distinguish

intercom

outside

pattern is used to
calls from incoming

calls.
,

Press
doorphone
button
1 second

Confirmation
tone

Talk

Operation
None

Conditions

To answer a doorphone

Incoming

outside

calls (including

outside

hold

recall )
1

Lift

Press
SP-PHONE

handset

I-1

1 set

Operation
Calling

from the doorphone.

1. Press the doorphone

Intercom

calls (including

intercom

hold recall)

button 1 second.

2. Wait for the other partys voice after hearing


the confirmation

tone and then start talking.

To answer a doorphone
Lift the handset

or press the SP-PHONE

button.

Doorphone

calls

Conditions
l

If calls from doorphones


within

15 seconds,

are not answered

I-!

the calls will be

1 set

I
I

cancelled.
l

Recall for camp-on

Ring from doorphone.

Each extension
beforehand

has been programmed

for receiving

See Ringing

Assignment

from doorphones.
from Doorphone

on page 3-76.
l When

you press a Dial button while talking with a

doorphone, the DTMF tone will be sent to the


doorphone.

4-13

I
I

I
I

I
I

I
I

While Having a Conversation

To retrieve:

To leave a call on hold:

(Outside calls on hold)


at the holding extension

(Intercom call on hold)


at the holding extension

I
Press
HOLD

flashing slowly
in green

Confirmation
tone of 2
beeps will
be heard

ICM

1[I)

1 (flashing

1 ,

1SlOWlY)

Press IC-M

Press CO

from another extension

from another extension

flashing slowly
in red
Press CO

Dial 5

Dial holding
extension
number

Description
If you wish to leave your phone unattended but
want the caller you are in conversation with to
wait, call on hold may be used. Outside
or intercom calls may be on hold.
Calls on hold can be released by other
extensions.

Operation

0 If a call is placed on hold for more than 3 minutes,


a hold time reminder will be sounded and the LCD
flashes the following displays.
l
When holding the extension 101; Mr. Brown:
The display of 101: Brown will flash.
l
When holding the Outside line; CO 01:
The display of Call on CO 01 will flash.
The call will be terminated automatically after
30 minutes.
A hold time reminder is sounded through the
built-in speaker of the extension.
There are 9 choices ranging from 1 minute to 9
minutes in the hold time reminder.
For programming, see the page 3-25.

1. You are in conversation with an outside or


internal party.
2. Press the HOLD button.
The indicator of CO or ICM button which is
on hold will flash slowly (green color).
The confirmation tone of 2 beeps will be
heard.
To Retrieve at the holding extension,

press the CO or ICM button (flashing


g ree n).
The indicator light will return to a steady
green.
To Retrieve from another extension,
n

press the CO button (flashing slowly in


red).

The hold time reminder is activated, even if


the hold recall time set is programmed to
Disable.

When lifting the handset (or press the SPPHONE button):


before recalling - - - - A dial tone will be heard
with the call on hold.
You may dial another
phone number.

or
dial (5) and then the extension (100
through 199) or CO (301 through 312)
number of the phone on which the call
was placed on hold.

PI WC1
:.-ABC-.- 100 through

199 (extension)

rBC_.-301 through 312 (CO)


The green flashing indicator at the held
extension will turn to red.

while recalling

Conditions
l An Intercom
l

call can

Calls on hold will be recalled after 30 seconds


or 1 minute or 1 minute and 30 seconds or 2
minutes, once handset is replaced (or the SPPHONE button is pressed).
If hold recall time is set to Disable, it will
not be recalled.
Refer to Hold Recall Time Set on page 3-26.

not be on hold more than two.

Outside calls can be on hold all COs


4-14

- - Only the first call on hold will


be released and entered into
the conversation
mode.

To leave a call on exclusive

hold:

To retrieve:
(Outside

(Intercom call on hold)

calls on hold)

lo3j

[ ;;;$::I

IBilBl
Press
again

Press
HOLD

Conditions

Description
Intercom or outside calls left on exclusive
not be released
phone which

by any extension

hold can

0 An Intercom call can not be on hold more than

other than the

has left the call on exclusive

two.

hold.

0 Outside calls can be on hold all COs,

l Calls on hold will be recalled

Operation
1. You are in conversation
internal

Press
ICM

Press
co

with an outside

or

party.

2. Press the HOLD button.


The indicator

of CO or ICM button which is

or 1 minute or 1 minute and 30

seconds

or 2 minutes,

will flash in groups of 2 (green

pressed).

If hold recall time set is set to

Disable,

will not be recalled.

a hold time reminder

sounded,

and the call will be terminated

built-in

in groups

is sounded

ranging

from 1 to

for the hold time reminder.


see the page 3-25.

0 The hold time reminder

on the ICM or CO button will

through the

of the extension.

For programming,

of 2 (green color).
The indicator

speaker

9 minutes

will be

after 30 minutes.

There are 9 choices

press the ICM button or the CO


is flashing

Refer to

minutes,

A hold time reminder

button whose indicator

is

(or the

automatically

color).

4. To retrieve,

once handset

SP- PHONE button is

replaced

l If a call is left on hold for more than 3

tone of 2 beeps will be heard.

3. Press the HOLD button, again.


The indicator

seconds

Hold Recall Time Set on page 3-26.

on hold will flash slowly (green color).


A confirmation

after 30

is activated,

even if

the hold recall time set is programmed

return to a steady green.

to

Disable.
0 When lifting the handset
SP-PHONE

(or press the

button):

before recalling

..-

A dial tone will be heard


with the call on hold.
You may dial another
phone number.

while recalling

. . . Only the first call on hold


will be released

and entered

into the conversation

4-15

mode.

El
CONF

Consult with
2nd party

Press
CONF

Press
CONF
[ ZJZ~GJ.zek

Description
Allows

caller.

/ 1- inside) (1- outside / 2- inside) or

l If both the conference parties are on outside lines:

(3-inside).

Press the CO button to.talk to the desired


party.

Operation
1. Press the CONF button, to leave the first

l If the conference

party on hold.

and an extension

2. Dial the number of the second

concerned,

parties are an outside caller


caller:

To talk to the outside

party.

If the second party does not answer,


the CO button of the outside

party, press the CO

button.

press

To talk to the extension

party

party, press the

ICM button.

or the ICM button to return to the

first party.

To leave the other two parties on hold at the


same time.

3. After the second party answers, press the CONF

Press the HOLD button.

button.
A

now]

To terminate one caller and talk to the other

for a three party conference,

(2-outside

0 In case the other two parties

3 party conference is now established.

extension,

Example:

are on the

the other two parties

can not be

left on hold.

Ext 102 & CO 02 will be displayed.

Conditions
l You may press the HOLD button instead

of
l Pressing

the first CONF button.

a CO button which is out of

conference,
To terminate conference
Replace

SP-PHONE

connected

together

each other. (Intercom

and to access an-outside

party

and the other parties to be connected

button.

l The other two parties

outside

conference

the handset or press the

allows you to exj.t from the

together.
will be directly

If the other parties are outside

and can converse

with

calls and intercom

are OK, outside to outside

they are disconnected.

to

If the other

is not

extension,

possible.)
If you want to leave the conference,

ones,

parties are on the outside


they are connected.

l When both the conference

press

extension,

the CONF button instead of SP-PHONE

and

parties are on the

even if anyone of the conference

parties press the ICM button, a three party

button and if you want to join the conference

conference

again, press the flashing (in groups of 2) CO


button.
4-16

is gone on.

At another extension that want to join into the conversation;

While you are speaking on a CO line,


l Before pressing the CO button, inform

another extensron user to join into the


conversation by word of mouth.

Fb
Press
co
within
5 seconds

Press CO
already in use
quickly flashing
in green for
5 seconds

quickly flashing
in green for
5 seconds

To terminate

Description
Allows

of 1 beeps will
be heard

an extension

with an outside
conference

caller.

user that is in conversation

To talk to the outside

party to make a three party

by having another extension

one caller and talk to the other

party, press the CO

button.

join into

To talk to the extension

the conversation.

party, press the ICM

button.

Operation
1. You are in conversation

2. Inform another
conversation

with an outside

extension

Conditions
e After an extension

party.

button, the indicator

user to join into the

Pressing

of the other extensions

into the conversation


whose indicator
within

presses the CO button

(1-outside

Replace

(green color)
tone will be

extension.
is now established.

/ 2- inside)

conference.

the handset

SP-PHONE

flashing

a confirmation

3 party conference
To terminate

user that want to join

is quickly

5 seconds,

heard at another

will

flash (green color) for 5 seconds.

4. When another extension

(1 -outside/24nside)

back on hook or press the

button.

The other two parties will be directly


connected

together

and can converse

of the CO button again will add

another 5 seconds.

3. Press the CO button that you are using, and

quickly

of the other extension

will flash for only 5 seconds.

by word of mouth.

the CO indicator

user presses the CO

with

each other.

4-17

To transfer a call after the other extension answers

Press
TRANSFER

Dial
extension
number
(100 through
199)

Announce
and wait
for an
answer

To transfer a call without announcing


extension

Press
TRANSFER

Hang UP,
press
SP-PHONE,
FLASH,
CO or DSS

Dial
extension
number
(100 through
199)

to the other

Hang UP,
I press
SP-PHONE,
FLASH,
CO or DSS

To retrieve the Call

If the other extension does not answer the transferred


transferred, the call will return to you. In this case:

call within 30 seconds after the call has been

While the ring back is heard,

to return to the
calling party

In this case:

Description
Outside

or intercom

any extension

calls may be transferred

While the ring back is heard

to

and the LCD

flashes the following displays, lift the handset

manually.

to return to the calling party.

Operation

To change the party to whom a call is

1. You are engaged

in a call (outside or

transferred before hanging up

intercom).

Press the CO or ICM button whose indicator

2. Press the TRANSFER

button.

3. Dial number of extension

is flashing

(100 through

199)

repeat the procedure

to which the call is transferred.


4. For Unscreened

handset or press the SP-PHONE, FLASH,

SP-PHONE,

transferred

extension,

0 When busy, you may access the other

or press the

CO or DSS button.

extension

by dialing

or dialing

2 (Executive

1 (Busy station signaling)


Override)

Also you may return to the calling


does not answer the

call within 30 seconds

call has been transferred,

if

be terminated.

To retrieve the Call

If the other extension

Upon recall to the transferring

and announce

the handset

FLASH,

of Call Transfer.

the call is not answered whitin 30 minutes it will

CO or DSS button. For Screened call transfer,

call, then replace

the call, then

Conditions

call transfer, replace the

wait for new party. to answer

slowly to retrieve

after the

the call will return

the CO or ICM button whose

indicator

is flashing

slowly (green color).

The time that the call returns to you when the

changed
changing,

4-18

party by

pressing

transferred

to you.

and hang up.

call is not answered


from 30 seconds
see page 3-27.

can be-.

to 15 seconds.

For

To transfer a call after the outside party answers.

TRANSFER

and wait
for an
answer

number

To transfer a call without announcing

to the outside party.

Dial phone
number

Press CO

Press
TRANSFER

press
SP-PHONE,
DSS or
other CO

Hang UP,
press
SP-PHONE,
DSS or other CO

Conditions

Description
Outside

or intercom

calls may be transferred

any outside

line manually.

This feature

is required

to

If outside call is transferred

to any outside

line, the KX-T123211 will disconnect the call

to be set beforehand

in

from the line after 10 minutes.

For changing

the KX-T123211.

the time, see CO to CO Duration

For programming, see page 3-72.

Limit on page 3-30.


3 beeps tone will be heard every 5 seconds

Operation
1. You are engaged

for 15 seconds

in a call (outside or

2. Press the TRANSFER

button.

3. Press the CO button to which the call is

If the outside

call is transferred

to another

outside line through the KX-T123211, the

transferred.

KX-T123211 may not disconnect both lines

4. Dial the phone number to which the call is

after the calling party or called party hangs up

transferred.

if the calling parties line or called party line

5. For Unscreened

call transfer,

replace

the

(central office exchange) does-not release a

back on hook or press the

CPC (Calling Party Controi) signal to the line.

SP-PHONE, DSS or other CO button except CO

However the KX-T123211 Will disconnect the

button which the call transferred.


For Screened

call transfer,

to answer and announce


the handset

before the call is disconnected

from the line.

intercom).

handset

Time

line after the time that you have

wait for new party

programmed.

call, then replace

back on hook or press the

0 If you want to join the transferred

call, press

SP-PHONE, DSS or other CO button except CO

the flashing (in groups of 2) CO button and if

button which the call transferred.

you want to leave the conference,

To change the party to whom a call is

CONF button.

transferred before hanging up


Press the CO button whose indicator
slowly to retrieve
procedure

is flashing

the call, then repeat the

of Call Transfer.
4-19

press the

To terminate the original call and talk to the new caller.

Will hear a
call waiting
tone

Press CO or KM
whose indicator
is flashing
qUlCKly

IIW c
I Ivw
I +nrminQ+nA
call is

To leave the original call on hold and talk to the new caller.
l If both original call and new call are intercom calls:
(The ICM indicator will change into quickly flashing when the new call is reached.)

Will hear a
call waiting
tone

Press
HOLD

[
l If original

or
If original

Dial tone
is not
heard.

Consult with
the new caller
while the
original call is
on hold

/II

Press ICM to
terminate the
2nd call and to
return to the
original call

call is CO call, and new call is CO call or intercom


call is intercom

Will hear a
call waiting
tone

Press
HOLD
The dial
tone is
[ heard.

call:

call and new call is CO call:

Press CO or ICM
whose indicator
is flashing
quickly

Consult with
the new caller
while the
original call is
on hold

Description

Press CO or ICM whose


indicator is flashing slowly to
terminate the 2nd call and to
return to the original call

2. Press the HOLD button for placing a


conversation on hold.
3. Consult with the new caller.
4. Press the ICM button to terminate the
second call and to return to the original
call.
l If original call is CO call, and new call & CO
call or intercom call:
or
If original call is intercom call and new call is
CO call:
1. You will hear a call waiting tone.
2. Press the HOLD button for placing a
conversation on hold.
3. Press the CO or ICM button whose
indicator is quickly flashing .
4. Consult with the new caller.
5. Press the CO or ICM button whose
indicator is flashing slowly to terminate the
second call and to,return to the original call.

Call waiting tone during a conversation


indicates
there is a new incoming CO line call or Intercom
call.
This feature has been set beforehand in the
extension. See page 4-43.
There are Tone 1 and Tone 2 in the Call Waiting
Tone.
For changing Tone 1 into Tone 2, see Call
Waiting Tone Selection on page 4-64.

Operation
To terminate the original call and talk to the
new caller.
1. You will hear a call waiting tone (3 beeps).
2. Press the CO or ICM button whose
indicator is quickly flashing. The original
call is now terminated.
3. Start talking.
To leave the original call on hold and talk to the
new caller.
l If both original call and new call are intercom
calls:
(The ICM indicator will change lighting into
quickly flashing when new call reaches.)
1. You will hear a call waiting tone (3 beeps).

Conditions
l If a call waiting

tone is heard and the CO or


ICM indicator does not flash, this tone
indicates a call waiting tone by your telephone
company.
In this case, see Call Waiting-Outside
Line
on page 4-39.

4-20

Press HOLD
to leave 1st
E;;Y on

Consult with
1st party

Dial 2nd
party

Consult with
2nd party

Press HOLD
to leave 2nd
E;;Y on

Consult with
2nd party

Press ICM or CO
whose indicator
is flashing slowly

Press HOLD
to leave 1st
f:;;~ on

8. Press the ICM or CO button whose indicator


is flashing slowly.

Description
Allows an extention user to alternate
CO party and an intercom party.

between

a
9. Consult with the second party.
10. Repeat step 4 to 9.

Operation
1. Press the HOLD button to leave the first party
on hold.
2. Dial the second

Press CO or ICM
whose indicator
is flashing slowly

Conditions
l To release

the call splitting mode,press the


CO or ICM button without pressing the
HOLD button.
Conversation will be terminated and call on
hold will be returned into conversation.

party.

3. Consult with the second

party.

4. Press the HOLD button to leave the second


party on hold.
5. Press the CO or ICM button whose indicator
is flashing slowly.
6. Consult with the first party.
7. Press the HOLD button to leave the first party
on hold.

4-21

To enable
HOLD

Be sure the SP-PHONE

indicator

is on.

lrl

Dial
2nd
party

Press
HOLD to
leave 1st party
on hold

Consult
with
2nd party

HOLD

10

To cancel
1

Press
HOLD to
leave
2nd party
on hold

Consult
with
1st party

The MUTE indicator

Press
HOLD to
leave
1st party
on hold

will flash.

Press
again

The MUTE indicator


will go out.

Description
Allows an extension user to alternate
between two intercom parties.

Description
Use when you do not want your voice to be
heard by the other party.

Operation
1. Press the HOLD button to leave the first
party on hold.

Operation
To enable

2. Dial the second


3. Consult

party.

with the second

Be sure the SP-PHONE indicator


Press the MUTE button.
lThe MUTE indicator will flash.

party.

4. Press the HOLD button to leave the second


party on hold.

To cancel
Press the MUTE button again.
will go out.

lThe MUTE indicator

5. Consult with the first party.

Conditions

6. Press the HOLD button to leave the first


party on hold.

This feature can be activated


speakerphone
mode.

This feature can not be activated while using


the headset.

7. Repeat step 3 to 6.

Conditions
l

is on.

To release the cafl splitting mode,press the


ICM button instead of the HOLD button.
Conversation will be terminated and call on
hold will be returned into conversation.

4-22

only in the

To Use the Handset


While having a conversation

using speakerphone

,
You will hear
voice announcement
of a second
call and talk.

Lift
handset

To Use the Hands-free

While you have conversation using the handset, this


feature allows an extension user to intrude through
the speaker of the KX-T123235.
As to the operation of extension user, Busy Station
Signaling on page 4-a.
This feature is available the KX-T123235 only.

Press
St-PHONE

Hang up
handset

Description

Operation
While having a conversation

using the handset

While having a conversation

Description

You may choose the handset or hands-free.


using the handset;

1. You will hear voice announcement


call.

Operation

cf a second

To use the handset


While having a conversation

2. Consult with the second party.

using

speakerphone;
lift the handset.

Conditions
0 This feature can not be activated while in the

To use hands-free

speaker phone mode.

While having a conversation

using the

handset;
1. Press the SP-PHONE

button.

2. Hang up the handset.


l When the other party finds it difficult

to hear

your voice:
Lower the sound Ieve. using the SPEAKER
VOLUME

CONTROL

l Absorbing

or speak louder.

echoes:

Use in a room which

has curtains

or

carpeting.
l To avoid lost conversations:

If some part of the conversation


talking,

4-23

speak alternately.

.
is lost while

To access

1 To

access
Dial 330

Lift
or press
SP-PHONE

:PT%NE

I hi
Page

Confirmation
tone of 1 beep
will be heard

Page

Confirmation
tone of 1 bee1
will be heard

Dial 33 *

Lift handset

I hi

Wait for an
answer
and talk

n Paging

will be heard only from


built-in speaker of proprietary
telephone.

Wait for an
answer and
talk

n Page will be heard from the built-in speaker


of proprietary telephone and external paging
equipment.

Description
Allows paging to all extensions.
The page can only be heard from each
proprietary telephones (KX-Tl23230,
KX-T123235, KX-Tl23220 or KX-T123250, etc).

Operation

Description
Allows paging to all extensions and external
paging equipment at the same time.
The page can be heard from the built-in speaker
of proprietary telephone and external paging
equipment.

To access paging;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
2. Dial (330) and wait for confirmation
(one beep).
Paging All Ext will be displayed.

Operation

tone

To access paging;
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.

3. Start paging.

2. Dial (33 *) and wait for confirmation tone (one


beep).
Paging All will be displayed.
0 You may dial (32 *) instead of (33 *).

4. Wait for an answer and talk...

Conditions
l When an extension

is in use, that extension


cannot gain access to paging.
l When any extension is using the paging (all
extensions or group), you cannot
access to paging.

3. Start paging.
4. Wait for an answer and talk.

Conditions
0 When an extension

is in use, that extension


cannot gain access to paging.

When any extension is using the paging (all


extensions, group or external), you cannot
access to paging.
4 - 24

To access

Dial 33

Lift handset
:P%%N

mi

Confirmation
tone

Confirmation

Dial 32
exterrd

SP-PHONE

paMva

VJi:zi

Page

nPaging

will be heard only

tone

answer

will be heard

from external

from the built-in speaker


of proprietary

Lift handset
or press

;1u:::igh*)

Wait for an
answer
and talk

Page

nPaging

Dial
extension
group

equipment

paging

(1 and / or 2).

telephone.

Description
Allows access to external

paging equipment.

Description
Operation

Allows paging to one of eight extension


groups.
The page can only be heard from each
proprietary telephones
(KX-T123230,
KX-Tl23220
or KX-T123250 etc).

To access external paging;


1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.

Operation
To

2. Dial (32).

access paging;

1. Lift the handset


button.

3. Dial the external paging number (0 through


2) and wait for confirmation tone (one beep).

or press the SP-PHONE

2. Dial (33).
3. Dial the extension
A confirmation

Paging
Paging
Paging
Paging

group number (1 through

8).

tone (one beep) will be heard.

Group
Group
Group
Group

1 ,
3 ,
5 ,
7 or

Paging Group 2,
Paging Group 4,
Paging Group 6,
Paging Group 8,

0: for external paging 1 and 2


Extrnl Page 1 & 2 will be displayed.
1: for external paging 1
Extrnl Page 1 will be displayed.
2: for external paging 2
Extrnl Page 2 will be displayed.
4. Start paging.
When the page is answered,
be heard. Start talking.

o&beep

will

will be displayed.

Conditions

4. Start paging.

0 If external

5. Wait for an answer and talk.

Conditions
l If an extension

is in use,that extension
not gain access to paging.

l Refer to Extension

Assignment

Group
on page 3-66.

will

paging access tone is set to


Disable,
confirmation
tone from external
paging equipment will not be heard after
accessing the external paging.
Refer to External Paging Access Tone-on
page 3-41.

To transfer a call to the paged person

-e

While havino
a conversat&

To page from built-in speaker.

Dial 330

Press
TRANSFER

Dial 43

pfLjjm.mm
Confirmation
tone
l

Hang UP,
press
SP-PHONE,
FLASH,
DSS or CO

You may dial 331 through 338


or 320 through 322 instead of 330.

Dial 42

Operation
To transfer a call to the paged person;

button.

or external

can be answered

from any

Operation

all extensions.
extension

group 1.

Diat (332) for paging

extension

group 2.

Dial (333) for paging

extension

group 3.

Dial (334) for paging

extension

group 4.

Dial (335) for paging

extension

group 5.

Dial (336) for paging

extension

group 6.

Dial (337) for paging

extension

group 7.

Dial (338) for paging

extension

group 8.

Dial (320) for external

paging

1 and 2.

Dial (321) for external

paging

1.

Dial (322) for external

paging

2.

for paging all extensions

0 Wait for confirmation

speaker

extension.

Dial (331) for paging

Dial (33 * or 32~)


external.

Dial
Talk
Confirmation
external
tone
paging
number
1:for external paging equipment 1
2:for external paging equipment 2

A page from the built-in


paging equipment

3. Dial (330) for paging

Talk

Description

1. You are in conversation.


2. Press the TRANSFER

-~

To paging from External Equipment.

Wait for an
answer

Page

__

Confirmation
tone

To answer a page through the built-in speaker;


1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
2. Dial (43) and wait for confirmation
beep).

tone (one

3. Start talking.
To answer an external page
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
and
2. Dial (42).

tone.

3. Dial the external paging number (1 or 2 ) and


wait for confirmation tone (one beep).
1:for external paging 1.
2:for external paging 2.

4. Start paging.
5. Wait for an answer.

Conditions
l

6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE FLASH, DSS or


CO button.

4-26

If a call and CO number has been paged and


transferred, you may answer by pressing the
CO button whose number has been paged
and indicator is flashing slowly (red color),
instead of dialing 43,421 or 422.

Use of Other Features


r

Setting
All Calls

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Busy

Dial ti

Dial 1

Dial
extension
number
to whom the
call is
forwarded

Press
FWD/DND
(F3)

Dial 2

Dial
extension
number
to whom the
call is
forwarded

Dial #

Press
FWD/DND
e31

Dial 0

Dial #

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Press
FWDl DND
(F3)

Hana UD or
press
SP-PHONE

or No Answer

Lift handset
~PTZNE

To cancel

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Description
0 The programmable feature (F3 only) button of
the KX-T123250, KX-T61650, KX-T30825 or
KX-T30850 can also be used for Call
Forwarding if programming is done beforehand
in the extension. For programming, see page
4-65.

All Calls

All intercom calls to your extension can be


automatically
forwarded to any extension within
the system.
For outside calls to your extension, if your extension
is set to the Direct In Line (DIL) or call is the CO
line which is programmed to the DISA, the outside
calls can be automatically forwarded to any
extension within the system.
For programming to the DIL or DISA mode, see page
3-57.
Busy or No Answer

Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.

2. Press the FWD/DND

If your extension is busy or does not answer the


call within 3 rings (Call Forwarding Starting Time
on page 3-28 can change from 3 rings to 1 ring, 2
rings or 4 rings.), Intercom calls to your extension
can be automatically forwarded to any extension
within the system.
For outside calls to your extension, if your extension
is set to the Direct In Line (DIL) or call is the CO
line which is programmed to the DISA, the outside
calls can be automatically forwarded to any
extension within the system.

(or F3) button.

3. To forward all calls, dial (1).


To forward the calls when your extension
busy or do not answer, dial (2).
4. Dial the number of the extension to which
the calls are to be forwarded (100 through
199).
.
5. Dial the (a) button.
r
A confirmation tone will be heard .
FWD (All) Ext 102 or FWD (B/ NA)
Ext 102 will be displayed.
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
The FWD/ DND indicator will flash.
4-27

is

To cancel
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
The indicator light of the FWD/DND button
will be off.

An extension can not accommodate


more than
one forwarded extension.
At each time of newly setting Call
Forwarding,a
destination (forwarded
extension code) will be renewed.
Old entry will be canceled.

2. Press the FWD/ DND (or F3) button.


3. Dial (0).

accommodates
one forwarded

4. Dial the (a) button.


A confirmation tone will be heard.
FWD/ DND Cancel will be displayed.
5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

Conditions
Do Not Disturb is cancelled
forwarding is established.
Recall for camp-on
forwarded.

when call

and Hold recall are not

The tone (busy tone or do not disturb tone


etc.) the caller receives depends on the
condition of the forwarded extension.

do ndt disturb tone

If extension A is forwarding all calls to extension


B and B is forwarding all calls to C,
if any extension calls A, they will be connected
to B and can not be connected to C.
Call Forwarding can be connected to only 1st
fowarded extension.
A

When an intercom call to the forwarding


extension is originated from the forwarded
extension, the forwarded extension user will
hear a reorder tone.

reorder

tone : (two beeps a second)

forwarded
extension

0 Call Forwarding-No Answer will not function


in Automatic Answer mode on page 4-10
and Intercom Voice Alerting mode on page

Any extension calls A can


not be forwarded to C

4-60.

4-28

Setting

H You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _An extensioncan

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE
-

To

Dial 3

Press
FWD/ DND
tF31
\

Dial 9

-I

Dial
phone
number
to whom the
call is
forwarded

Dial I#

Hang up
%T?i%NE
81

-.........-

through 88

cancel

automatically select
an idle line within the
CO line enable to call.
An extension can
select a trunk 9roup
designated.

III

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Press
FWD/DND
(F3)

Dial 0

Dial #

Hang up
or press
SP-PHONE

Description
intercom caiis to your extension can be
automatically
forwarded to any outside line.
For outside calls to your extension, if your
extension is set to the Direct In Line (DIL) or call is
the CO line which is programmed to the DISA, the
outside calls can be automatically forwarded to any
tha
ml
nr nlca
n,L0I
,tcirln
linn
nrnnrPmmi

111
I.?. Icnr
I r/
._J,w,,,,,,,,y n tn
L LIIG IL
VI ,T\
mode, see page 3-57.
This feature is required to be set beforehand in the
KX-T123211. For programming, see page 3-73.
The programmable
feature (F3 only) button of
the KX-T123250, KX-T61650, KX-T30825 or
KX-T30850 can also be used for Call Forwarding
if programming is done beforehand in the
OytpnGnn
v,.._.._._...

.Fnr
_. nrnnrnmminn
P.-J.... . . .. . ... .J, S~F)
--- nanF!
r-a-

@5.

Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
2. Press the FWD/ DND (or F3) button.
3. Dial (3).
4. Dial (9).
l You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9.
9 -......... ....... . . . . . . ..- An extension can
automatically select an idle
line within the CO line enable
to call.
81 through 88 ...... An extension can select a
tr,
1-1,
.._l I.-. u=
rlnn;,...rr+-rl
LIUI
In
y,vup
31y,Idle.
5. Dial the phone number of the outside line to
which the calls are forwarded.
6. Dial (#).
A confirmation tone will be heard.
FWD (All) All COs or FWD (All) CO Gl
will be displayed.
7. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
Thn

FWn/

l3Nl-I

inrliratnr

will

flach

To cancel
1-__A__. __ -.._ __ Lo-_ nil n, Ir\LlY
i. iiii iiie nanaser or press me 3r-rnurvt
button.
The indicator light of the FWD/DND button
will be off.
2. Press the FWD/DND (or F3) button.
3. Dial (0).
A
V. nini
I(11 1~1
\+P).

5.

A confirmation tone will be heard.


FWD/DND Cancel will be displayed.
Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

Conditions
- Do Not Disturb is cancelled

when call
forwarding is established.
Recall for camp-on and Hold recall are not
forwarded.
The phone number to whom the call is
forwarded is used from 0 to 9 and pause
except *and # . A maximum of phone
number is 32 digits (Automatic line access
number 9 or trunk group access number 81
through 88 are included).
0 If outside call is forwarded to any outside
line, the KX-T123211 will disconnect the
call from the line after 10 minutes. For
changing the time, CO to CO Duration Time
Limit on page 3-30.3 beeps tone will be
heard every 5 seconds for 15 seconds before
the call is disconnected
from the line.
rr,dcirlr\
,--,I1 ic fnr...e-,rrlorl
in nnnthar
3 IIIf thn
LI IG ULOIUG
ball
13 I, al~u
L (II lll1G31
outside line through the KX-T123211, the
KX-Tl23211 may not disconnect both lines after
the calling party hangs up if the calling
parties line (central office exchange) does
not release a CPC (Calling Party Control)
signal to the line.
However the KX-T123211 will disconnect the
line

after

the timn

programmed.

that

vntl have

Setting

Dial 721 e

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

To cancel

~
I

Dial 72Oz

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Conditions

IDescription
Allows

you to prohibit

from answering

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

any other extension

calls directed

user

While your extension

Deny mode, you can place or receive

to you.

or intercom

Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset

or press the SP-PHONE

button.
2. Dial (721s).
Wait for a confirmation
C.Pickup

tone.

Deny will be displayed.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

To cancel,
1. Lift the handset

or press the SP-PHONE

button.
2. Dial (720~).
Wait for a confirmation
C.Pickup

tone.

Allow will be displayed.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

is in the Dial Call Pickup

button.

calls.

outside

Setting

#
cl

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 4

Dial #

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Dial 0

Dial #

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

To cancel

Press
FWD/ DND
(F3)

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Description

To cancel

Each extension

can be individually

for not receiving

intercom

The programmable
KX-T123250,
KX-T30850

feature

KX-T61650,

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

programmed

call or outside

button.

calls.

The indicator

(F3 only) button of the


KX-T39825

or

2. Press the FWD/DND

can also be used for Do Not Disturb

if programming

is done beforehand

of FWD/ DND button will go

out.
(or F3) button.

3. Dial (0).

in the

4. Dial (ti).

extension.
For programming,

FWDIDND

see page 4-65.

Cancel will be displayed.

Wait for a confirmation

tone.

5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset

button.

Conditions

or press the SP-PHONE

0 When Do Not Disturb is entered,

button.

CaTI

Forwarding will be canceled.

2. Press the FWD/ DND (or F3) button.


3. Dial (4).
0

4. Dial (#).

extension

Do Not Disturb will be displayed.


Wait for a confirmation

The indicator

of FWD/DND

from recalling

the

for on-hold

and

camp-on.

tone.

5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

Do Not Disturb does not prevent

button.
0 If calling

button will be

party use the Do Not Disturb

Override feature, the call will receive the

lit.

extension
Disturb.

that is setting the Do Not


r

See the Do Not Disturb Override


4-32.

4-31

on page

Programming

a.. .
. . . . . ..
\

I
Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial
extension
number
(100 through 199)

II

When the called line is busy or while you are


speaking on the CO Line;

Do not
disturb
tone is heard

m.

(c;1/

Lift handset
orpress
SP-PHONE

Press
SAVE

Dialing

Description
can dial to the extension

that is

Description

set for the Do Not Disturb.

The desired
This feature

Press
SAVE

Ring back
tone is heard and
wait for answer

Dial 1

This feature

Press AUTO

is required

the KX-T123211.

to be set beforehand

in

phone number on an outgoing

call

to CO line can be stored and then redialed.

For programming,

Programming
see page 3-75.

While you are speaking


when the called

Operation
1. Lift the handset

on the CO line or

party is busy.

1. Press the AUTO button.


2. Press the SAVE button.

or press the SP-PHONE

button.

The phone number can not be stored even


if you press the AUTO and SAVE buttons

2. Dial the extension

number

(100 through

199).

after you hang up.

3. Do not disturb tone is heard.

Dialing

4. Dial (1) and after a ring back tone is heard,

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

wait for an answer.

button.
2. Press the SAVE button.
You may press the CO button to select the

Conditions
0

CO line directly

When the line is-busy after dialing

(l), busy

press the SP-PHONE

tone will be heard. In this case, the extension


user can use Camp-on

(Automatic

after lifting the handset or


button.

Conditions
0 Up to 32 digits can be stored and redialed.

Call Back

0 When using the KX-T123235, one pressing of

Busy) mode.

the SAVE button;

Do not disturb tone

When using the handset; redial once

When using hands;free; redial up to 15.times


(Automatic Redialing) within

lo-minutes.

To cancel automatic redialing, press the


FLASH button.
l

The KX-T123250,

KX-T61650, KX-T30825

or KX-T30850 will not function for Saved


4-32

Number Redial.

To Deny Executive Override

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 7330 #

press
SP-PHONE

To Allow Executive Override


.

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 7331~

Description

To Allow Executive Override

Allows you to prohibit another extension user


from intruding into your conversation with an
outside or inside party.
Default is Allow mode .
For programming of the intrusive extension,
see Executive Override on page 3-74.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

button.

2. Dial (7331).
Busy Ovrde Allow will be displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

Operation

button.

Conditions
l

To deny Executive Override


1. Lift the handset

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

or press the SP-PHONE

Override-CO,

Data Line Security on page 4-42.

button.

2. Dial (7330 #).


Busy Ovrde Deny will be displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

When deny Executive

button.

4-33

refer to

n To Listen

Dl
1

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 1 I

Wait until
confirmation
tone is heard

Dial
extension
numbe.r

n ToCancel

Ring back
tone is heard

Description

Description
Voice

alerting

is established

(through

built-in

at the called

can be switched

to Tone

speaker)

that

partys

extension,

alerting

(ringing).

This feature is required to be set beforehand


the called

partys

extension.

Music from an external


listened

to on the built-in

proprietary

speaker

of the

telephone.

at

For programming,

Operation
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the

see page 4-60.

SP-PHONE

button is off.

To listen

Operation
1. Lift the handset

source (e.g. radio) can be

Dial (1).

or press the SP-PHONE

BGM on will be displayed.

button.
2. Dial the extension

Music will be heard from the speaker.

number.

3. Wait for a confirmation

tone after inter office

To cancel

calling.

Dial (1).

4. Dial (* ).

BGM off will be displayed.

The ring back tone will be heard.


Tone Ringer on the called

partys extension

Conditions

will be ready to be activated.

l When listening

to the background

music will be interrupted

by incoming

lifting handset or pressing


button. After completion
replacing

the handset

4-34

music.

calls,

the SP-PHONE
of the conversation

on the cradle or be

pressing of the SP-PHONE


the background

music, the

button, will resume

setting
Message 4. Back at lo:23 AM
l-l-l-

Message 1. Will Return Soon

~
Dial 751 8

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 754,,

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang up or

#
cl

!$+T=~H~NE

Enter
minute
(00 through 59)

Message 2. Gone Home

;
Dial 752 W

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial #
0:for AM
1 :for PM

Message 5. Out Until 10123

Lday

[Fg

Hang up or

month

[al Ia]

!$?H~NE

Message 3. At Ext

2 ,3
I

extension

tnter
day
(01 through 31)

number

Message

Dial #

6. In a Meeting

Hang up or
K~~SH~NE

Dial 753

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

pTjpq
Dial
extension
number
(100 through

Enter
month

Dial 755

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Dial #

Hang up or
pres%
SP-PHONE

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

199)

4-35

Dial 756=

through

To cancel the message

Dial 750#

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Description
Absent messages (Message 1 through 6) which
are programmed can be informed to calling party.
Programming
can be done at any telephone
(either proprietary telephones or standard
telephones).
When a caller using the proprietary telephone with
LCD dials the extension in which the message is
programmed,
it will be displayed on the LCD.

Message 5. Out Until 1 O/23


1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
2. Dial (755)
3. Enter the month. (01 through
4. Enter the day. (01 through

12)

31)

5. Dial (8)
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

Operation
Setting

button.

Message 6. In a Meeting

Message 1. Will Return Soon

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.

2. Dial (756s)

2. Dial (751#)

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

Message 2. Gone Home


1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.

Those Absent Messages


on the LCD of the calling

Message

will be displayed
party.

To cancel

2. Dial (752s)
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.

button.

2. Dial (750s)

3. At Ext. 123

Message

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.

Cancel will be displayed.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

2. Dial (753)
3. Dial the extention

number.

(100 through

199)

Conditions

4. Dial (a)

5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE


Message

4. Back

at lo:23

button.

AM

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.
2. Dial (754)
3. Enter the hour (01 through

12)

4. Enter the minute (00 through

59)

5. Dial (0) or (1).


Dial (0) for AM.
Dial (1)for PM.
6. Dial (#)
7. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

The absent message will be displayed on the LCD


of the calling party in case of following.
l
When a calling party dialsan extension that is
programmed for absent Message.
l
When the extension is busy.
l
When the extension is set the Do Not Disturb.

button.
4-36

To call you from the extension where the


message is left.

Setting

El

R!iiil

MESSAOE

Lin handset

Dial

:P%%NE

extension
number
(100 Through 199)

Lift handset
or Dress
SF-PHONE

Press
M ESSAG E

Talk

M ESSAG E

To cancel the message


the message is left.
t
,
Confirmation
tone

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Description

number

(100 through

button.

0 This feature will not function


telephone.

button.

with a standard

0 Each extension can receive up to eight messages.


0 If the MESSAGE Indicator does not go out
after calling the extension which= is left the
message, it means that another message is left.

button

In case of having received multiple messages,


Dialing is done in order of receipt.
But the extension to dial can be selected with
Proprietary Telephone with LCD.
When the Message button is pressed with the
handset on the cradle and the SP-PHONE button
off, name who left the message or extension
number is displayed.
During it is displayed, press the Message button
again. Repeat it until the desired name or
extension number appears.
When the desired name or extension number
appears, lift the handset and press the Message
button.

To cancel the message at the extension where the


message is left.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button

All Messages

199).

Conditions

3. Start talking

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.
199).

2. Press the MESSAGE button.


The MESSAGE Indicator will go out.

will go out.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

1 Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

Indicator

4. Press the MESSAGE button, again.


A confirmation tone (two beeps) will be heard.
The MESSAGE Indicator of the called extension
will go out.

To call the extension which sent the message from


the extension where the message is left.

2. Dial (70s)
The MESSAGE

number (100 through

3. Press the MESSAGE

3. Press the MESSAGE button.


A confirmation tone (one beep) will be heard.
The MESSAGE Indicator of the called party
will be lit.
4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

Dial 70s

2. Dial the extension

Setting
or press the SP-PHONE

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.

Operation
1. Lift the handset

where

To cancel a message which has been left at an


extension from the extension which has sent the
message.

If the intercom extension you have dialed is busy or


does not answer, you can inform the called extension
that there is a message which have to be informed. It
will be indicated by the MESSAGE indicator.
This feature also can be set after your call is answered
in the automatic hands-free mode.
If the called extension is not provided with the
MESSAGE button, you can not leave the message.
To change the CO, or DSS button into the message
waiting button, see page 4-59 or 4-62.

2. Dial the extension

at the extension

button.

will vanish.
4-37

(Extension jack number 01 only)


To enable night service: (lo disable

day service)

Dial 782 8

To disable night service:

Hang
press
SP-PHONE

(To enable day service)

;I

a
Dial 781 G

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Operation

Description
Normal system operation
Night service
ringing

allows for outward

assignments

1. Lift the handset

is set for day time mode.


dialing

and incoming

etc. to be rearranged

button of extension

via

extension

Night service
is enabled

or disabled

through

is enabled.

3. To return to day service,

at any time.

wait for a confirmation

Without activating
are automatically

this feature, the day/night


switched

at predetermined

services
A

(9:00 AM and 500 PM each day of the week for default


of Service

telephone

button.
with an LCD

is not used, the present mode selected

AUTO mode in the KX-T123211. Refer to Switching of

be shown by pressing

Service Mode on page 3-12 and Starting Time on page


3-13 in Day/Night Service Mode.
will be switched

tone.

Hang up or press the SP-PHONE


When the proprietary

Mode in Day/Night Service Mode is selected to the

features

dial (781~) and

Day Mode will be displayed.

time

7.

time) by the internal clock if the Switching

tone.

Night Mode will be displayed.

jack number 01 using this feature,

The following

of jack number 01.

2. Dial (782 #) and wait for a confirmation

programming.
Night service

or press the SP-PHONE

Day Mode

or Night Mode.
Flexible Outward Dialing Assignment on page
3-53.
Flexible Ringing Assignment on page 3-54.
CO Mode (NormaVDIUDISA) Assignment on page
3-57.
Delayed Ringing Assignment on page 3-56.
Service Class Assignment of Toll Restriction on
page 3-67.
Ringing Assignment of Doorphone on page 3-76.

4-38

the # button.

will

Call Waiting

- Outside

Line

a..
. . . . . :.

FLASH

l-l

tB
Will hear
a call
waiting
tone

Consult with
new caller
while
original call
is on hold

Press
FLASH

Consult with
original
caller while
2nd call
is on hold
If the calling party on
hold hangs up, the
line is terminated.

Description

Condition

Allows

an extension

central

office or host PBX. (example:

feature

can be supplied

The external

user to access features

feature

by central

l Flash can be stored into memory

of the

call waiting

same way as Storage on page 4-4.

l You may access

feature)

when engaged

on an

connected

Operation
example

shows you one of the

procedures.
Call Waiting - Outside Line
1. While

having a conversation,

party calls and a call waiting

another
tone is heard.

2. Press the FLASH button.


l The original

call is placed

on hold and

the new call can be answered.

3. Press the FLASH button again.


l The original

caller can be spoken to

again and the new call is placed

on

hold.
l If the calling

some features

of host PBX

using the Flash button. If KX-T123211 is

call.

The following

in the

office.)

(e.g. call waiting

can only be accessed


outside

party on hold hangs up, the

line is terminated.
4-39

to host PBX and flash operation

required,

follow the procedure

operation

which is required

is

of flash

in the host PBX.

Making a Call

Press
FWD/ DND
(F3)

account
code
Account
code is
[ 4 digits.

Receiving a Call
If you want to record a calling partys account
below - mentioned procedure.
Within 30 seconds
conversation,

of finishing

CO. dial
tone

phone
number

code in the SMDR, follow the

your conversation

or while having a

l Dialing

the account code


must be done before
hanging up.

Press
FWD/DND
(F3)

Dial
account
.~ code

n Making or Receiving a Call

If you want to record a calling or called partys account


in the SMDR, follow the below - mentioned procedure.
Within 30 seconds of finishing
having a conversation,

your conversation

code

or while

l Dialing

the account code


must be done before
hanging up.

Press
FWDl DND
(F3)

Dial
account
code
Account
code is
[ 4 digits.

1
.

4-40

Description

n Receiving a call

This feature
an account

gives each message

of the SMDR

code of the called or calling

Station Message

Detail Recording

If you want to record a calling

party.

code in the SM DR, follow the below-mentioned

(SMDR) is-

procedure.

cost saving feature that records all incoming

Within 30 seconds

[ and outgoing calls tnrough the CO line.


This feature has two mod.es Forced and

or while

Indicator

1. Press the FWD/DND

In the Forced mode, the account code must


every time the extension

In the Option
entered

of finishing

when

The FWD/DND

mode, the account code may be

2. Dial the account

code is

Account

needed.
to the Forced

(or F3) button.

mode, see page

Indicator

will light.

code.

code must be 4 digits.

l Dialing

When setting

will flash.

Enter ACCNT Code will be displayed.

user dials.

a record of the account

your conversation

having a conversation,

The FWD/DND

Option.

be entered

partys account

the account code must be done

before hanging

up.

3-71.
The programmable
the KX-T123250,
KX-T30850

feature

(F3 only)

KX-T61650,

button

KX-T30825

can also be used for Account

if programming

is done beforehand

OtHion Mode

of

or

n Making or Receiving a Call

Code

If you want to record a calling

in the

mentioned
see page 4-65.

procedure.

Within 30 seconds
or while

of finishing

(or F3) button.

Enter ACCNT Code will be displayed:


The FWD/DND

Forced mode
W Making a Call

2. Dial the account

1. Lift the handset

Account

or press the SP-PHONE

Indicator

The FWD/DND
Intermittent

Account
except

will light.

up.

digits

for the st and ++Ibut&r.

the FWD/ DND button and enter the correct

code.

code.

code must be 4 digits.

If account codes are programmed

CO dial tone will be heard.

telephone

5. Dial the phone number.

system
0 You may dial 9 or 81 through

code must be 4 numegcal

If you enter the wrong account code, press

tone is heard.

4. Dial the account

code must be done

Conditions

Code will be displayed.


Indicator

the account

will flash.

3. Press the FWD/ DND (or F3) button.


Enter ACCNT

will light.

code.

before hanging

2. Press the CO button.


The FWD/DND

Indicator

code must be 4 digits.

l Dialing

button.

pressing

your conversation

having a conversation,

1. Press the FWDIDND

Operation

Account

partys

account code in the SMDR, follow the below-

extension.
For programming,

or called

numbers

4-41

or

you need not to dial

code when making a call.

Program as follows.

the CO button.

for one touch dialing

speed dialing,

an account

88 instead of

with

Setting

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang upor
press
SP-PHONE

Dial 7301 sf

To Cancel

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Description

Conditions

This feature provides security when transmitting


data through an extension of the KX-Tl23211.
Executive override, call waiting tone and hold
time reminder tone from the KX-T123211 are
prohibited in this mode.

l The parallel

connection of the proprietary


telephone and a data terminal equipment
impossible.

Operation
Setting
1. Lift the handset

or press the SP-PHONE

button.

2. Dial (7301#)
Data Mode On will be displayed.
A confirmation
tone will be heard.
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE
To cancel
1. Lift the handset

Hang upor
press
SP-PHONE

Dial 73OOW

button.

or press the SP-PHONE

button.

2. Dial(7300#).
Data Mode 0ffwill
displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

4-42

is

To deny CO call waiting tone


I

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 731 OW

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

y&q
rl

To allow CO call waiting tone

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 731 l#

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

To deny extension call waiting tone

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 7320#

I&q I

To allow extension call waiting tone


I

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 7321W

2. Dial (731 la).


CW (CO) dn will be displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.

During a conversation,
a call waiting tone will
be heard when a third oartv on an outside line
or intercom calls you.Call waiting tone can be
removed at customers request.
Default is Allow mode.
Refer to Call Waiting on page 4-20.

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

To deny extension call waiting tone


1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.

Operation
To deny CO call waiting

tone

2. Dial (7320#).
CW (u(T) Off will be displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.

or press the SP-PHONE

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

2. Dial (7310#).
CW (CO) Off will be displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

To allow extension call waiting tone


button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.

To allow CO call waiting tone


1. Lift the handset
button.

Hang up or

&FZH~NE

Description

1. Lift the handset


button.

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

2. Dial (7321#).
c
CW (EXT) On will be displayed.
A confirmation tone will be heard.

or press the SP-PHONE

3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

4-43

button.

DSS(Direct Station Select)Button


Inter Office Calling(lntercom)

Transfer of Outside Calls to any Extension

[Console]

[EPhOJ
[Z&hOel

[Console]

NO.

El
Press
DSS

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

13[1lzl

Press

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Announce
and wait for
an answer

DSS

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Programmable Feature Button


Programming
l Be sure the handset
l Set the MEMORY

is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is OFF.


switch of a pair telephone (Proprietary telephone) to PROGRAM.

nTo Correct an Error while Proarammina

HStorage

w
TRANSFER

One Touch Dialing

l After pressing

the CLEAR
button, reprogram the correct
number.
l The TRANSFER button is
used as the CLEAR button.

Press
CLEARfTRANSFER)
instead of
MEMORY

Dial 9

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

Dial
phone
number

nTO Change a Stored Number

Press
MEMORY

Repeat Storage left side.

l You may dial 81 through

88 instead of 9.
9 . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . An extension can
automatically select an idle

HTO Erase after Programming


rConsole]

[ZiphonJ

line within the CO line enable


to call.

81 through

JTRANSFERI

88 .An extension can select a


trunk group designated.

9 or 81 through

88 must be dialed

for storage.

One Touch Access for System


Features

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

l The TRANSFER

All Extensions

Press
CLEAR
(TRANSFER)

Press
MEMORY

button is used as the CLEAR

button.

Example:
Paging

II

After programming all the numbers,return


MEMORY switch to SET.

(Dial 330).

Dialing

[Console]

[Console]

[ZIphonJ

.
III
Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

Dial 330

Press
MEMORY
Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

4-44

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

the

2. Enter the line access number.

Description
n DSS (Direct Station Select) Button:
makes the dialing to the extensions very
easy.
You can reach the extension party by simply
pushing the DSS Button.
Feature Button:
n Programmable
let you access various features of
KX-T123211 and speed dialing using the CO

9:automatic line access number.


8,l: access number of trunk group 1
88: access number of trunk group 8
3. Enter the phone number.
4. Press the MEMORY

button.

5. Repeat steps 1 to 4, to program


programmable
feature button.

on other

line in addition to the numbers programmed


into the KX-T123211s memory.
.

n To Confirm a Stored Number

Operation

Repeat programming
the same station.
Inter office Calling (Intercom)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button of pair telephone.

When the MEMORY


will be heard.

button is pressed,

a beep

l two beeps

_ The entry is the same as what was


previously stored.

l one beep

s. The entry is different from the one


that was previously stored.
Repeat the procedure of
programming.

2. Press the DSS button of Console.


3. Start talking.

the same number into

4. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button


after completion of the conversation.
Transfer of Outside Calls to any Extension

One Touch Access for System Features


1. You are in conversation.
2. Press the DSS button (Console) to which
the call is transferred.
3. Wait for Intercom party to answer and
announce call, then replace the handset or
press the SP-PHONE button.

Example:

Paging All Extensions

(Dial 330)

1. Press the programmable


Console.

feature

button of

2. Dial (330).
3. Press the MEMORY
telephone.

button of pair

Programming
l Be sure the handset

SP-PHONE

is in the cradle
button is OFF.

and the

l Set the MEMORY

(Proprietary

switch of a pair telephone


telephone) to PROGRAM.

After programming all the number% return the


MEMORY

switch to SET.

Dialing
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button of pair telephone.

One Touch Dialing


1. Press a programmable
Console.

feature

button of

2. Press the programmable


Console.

feature

button of

Conditions
Refer to One Touch Dialing page 4-4 and
One Touch Access for System Features
page 4-52.

To lock

ml
PRS

PRS

Dial lock
code
(000 through
999)

Dial 77

Lift handset

Dial f

Dial Same
lock code
again

Hang up or
KFHONE

To unlock

Dial #

Dial lock
code

Dial 77

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Conditions

Description
Locking an extension
dialing on an outside

prohibits another user from


line until unlocked.

When dialing to an outside line using a locked


extension, reorder tone will be heard.
Restricted will be displayed.

Operation
0 LOCK code must be 3 numerical
for the I# and X button.

To lock
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
2. Dial (77).
3. Dial the lock code.
Lock code must be 3 digits (100 through 999)
4. Dial the same lock code again.
5. Dial (#)
Locked

: 301 will be displayed.


I

lock code

6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

To unlock
1. Lift handset or press the SP-PHONE

button.

2. Dial (77).
3. Dial the lock code.
4. Dial (#).
Unlocked

will be displayed.

5. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

button.

4 -

46

digits except

Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE


Press the following
0 Proprietary

button which you want to confirm

Telephone

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

Press
SAVE

Press
REDIAL
0

button is off.

Press
FWDlDND

Press
MESSAGE

Press CO

Press DSS

DSS Console

I
Press DSS

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

Description

You can confirm your station status on the LCD.

Operation
0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the

0 DSS button
If Brown has been stored at extension
102 ; 102 : Brown will be displayed.

SP-PHONE button is off.


Press the button which you want to confirm.

0 CO button
If CO button has been changed into the
one touch dialing button, 29-123-4567
will be displayed.

SAVE button
If telephone number 456-7891 has been
stored, 456-7891 will be displayed.

FWD/DND button
If Do Not Disturb has been set, Do Not
Disturb will be displayed.
If Call Forwarding - All calls has been set
at extension no. 101, FWD (All) Ext 101
will be displayed.
If Call Forwarding - Busy or No Answer
has been set at extension no. 101, FWD
(B/NA) Ext 101 will be displayed.

no.

0 MESSAGE WAITING button


If a message from extension 102, Brown
has been stored ; 102 : Brown will be
displayed.

REDIAL button
If telephone number 123-456-78912345 has been stored, 123-4567891-12&l will be displayed.

PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE button
If telephone number 123-4567 bas been
stored, 123-4567 will be displayed.

If Call Forwarding - To Outside Line has


been set to trunk group 1, FVVD (All) CO
Gl will be displayed.

Conditions
l

When the display of the contents stored


exceeds 17 characters, the mark & will be
displayed at the right end of the LCD.

Setting

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 76

Enter
hour
+
(01 through 1:).

Enter
minute
(00 through 59)

To cancel

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Dial 762#

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Dial 763#

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Dial
O or 6, +
0
1

: for AM
: for PM

Dial
U, or 2

I[

Dial #

1 : only one day


2 : every day

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

To Confirm the setting time

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Description

To confirm the setting time


1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
2. Dial (763#).
Example :
0 If 10 : 10 AM has been stored, the LCD will
show below.
Alarm 10 : 10 AM ... only one day
Alarm 10 : 10 AM m ... every day
0 The LCD will show Alarm not Stored when
alarm time is not stored.
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

If a time is set, an Alarm tone will sound at the


preset time.

Programming
Setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
2. Dial (76).
3. Enter the hour with 2 digits (01 through 12).
4. Enter the minute (00 through 59).
5. Dial the 0 or 1.
0 : for AM
[ 1 : for PM
6. DJal the 1 or 2.
1 : When the time comes, an Alarm tone
sounds and the setting is automatically
cleared after it.
2 : An Alarm tone sounds every day at the
preset time.
7. Dial (#).
6. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.
To cancel the setting
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
2. Dial (762#).
3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE button.

To stop the Alarm tone


Lift the handset.

Conditions
Proprietary telephone equipped with LCD only
can be used to confirm.
Multiple times can not be set at the same time.
Setting a new time clears the preset time.
When the preset time comes, an Alarm tone
sounds for 30 seconds.
Alarm tone
lllll
4
4 - 48

1l-M
5sec

Dial
phone
number

Dial *#

Dial
phone
number

Dial 79#

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Hang up or
press
SP-PHONE

Description
When the dialing mode is required to change
pulse mode to a tone mode in one dialing
sequence, this feature is used.
(e.g.computer-accessed
long distance
service)

Description
Dialing
features

Operation
1. Dial the phone number.
2. Dial (*#)
3. Dial the phone number.

(pulse

Absent
(tone mode)

on an extension

station

to the default

data.

Message

Capability

Call Forwarding
Data Line Security

l When you dial using this feature,you

Dial Call Pickup Deny

must

use the line set to a pulse mode.


Phone number after dialing*
# will
change to tone mode.

Do Not Disturb

Example:Computer
- accessed long distance
service
l Local access telephone
number of the
alternate
long distance service company
765 - 4321,
Authorization
no.01 23456.
Long distance no. 543 - 210 - 9876
l Pulse mode is required by local access
telephone number of the alternate long
distance service company.
l Service of MCI, SPRINT, METRO or other
systems is used.

Authorization

reset the following

mode)

Conditions

Long distance
company no.

(79a)will

Long distance

Tone Deny

Background

M usic

Executive

Override

Message

Waiting

Deny

Timed Reminder

Operation
1. Lift the handset

or press the SP-PHONE

button.
2. Dial (79#) and wait for a confirmation

tone.

Ext Data Clear will be displayed.


3. Hang up or press the SP-PHONE

service

no.

Call Waiting

no.

4-49

button.

Description

Lamp indicators corresponding


to the status of
the CO (Central Office), the ICM (Intercom) and

DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons.

Explanation
ICM indicator

liaht

Light

Status

off

idle

on

slow flashing
flashing in
groups of 2

quick flashing

on hold
0 When a call on CO line
which the CO line
number is not assigned
is transfered to CO line.
hold

Light

Status

off

idle

on (green color)

in use

slow flashing
(green color)

on hold
on exclusive

hold

When a call on CO line


is transfered to CO line.

privacy

release

on (red color)

in use at another
extension

slow flashing
(red color)

on hold at another
extension

quick flashing
(red color)

receiving a call

0 receiving a call

of CO button which has been


into DSS button.

Light

light

quick flashing
(green color)

Indicator
changed

indicator

slow flashing in
groups of 2
(green color)

0 in use for intercom


0 in use for CO line
to which the CO line
number is not
assigned.

0 on exclusive

co

Status
(another extension)

DSS Console (KX-T123240,


indicator light

KX-T61640)

Light

Status

off

idle

on

in use

flashing in
groups of 2
slow
flashing

in setting Do Not Disturb

in setting Calf Forwarding

The DSS buttons which correspond to the


extensions on the system will light up
during incoming CO ring if:
l The extension
is programmed to ring.
l A standard telephone
is connected to
that extension.
l No telephone
is connected with that
extension.
To turn off the indicators (DSS buttons)
change the setting of Flexible Ringing
Assignment to Disable (see page 3-54).

4-50

Description

Description
The elapsed time (from dialing to replacing the
handset) on originating an outside call will be
displayed.

In the event of a power failure each CO will be


connected to assigned extension.
CO1 will be assigned to extension of jack number 01.
CO2 will be assigned to extension of jack number 02.
CO5 will be assigned to extension of jack number 09.
CO6 will be assigned to extension of jack number 10.
CO9 will be assigned to extension of jack number 17.
CO10 will be assigned to.extension of jack number 18.

Operation
,

None

Conditions
l When intercom

Operation

conversation

calls, the duration


is not displayed.

time of

l If extension

of jack number 01,02,09,


10, 17
and 18 is connected with a KX-T123230,
KX-T123235, KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or KX-T30830,
the Power failure switch on the KX-T123230,
KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or KX-T30830 must be set to
the ON position during power failure. If dialing
cannot be done, set the Dialing mode switch to other
position (TONE or PULSE).

0 Refer to Duration
on page 3-40.

Time Count Start Mode

Description
If a handset of standard telephone remains off hook
or is disconnected at the other end, a reorder tone
will be heard. When Calling Party Control (CPC)
Signal mode is set to Disable, the reorder tone
will not be heard. (see page 3-62)

Conditions
During power failure, all features are lost
except for incoming and outgoing CO calls from
extensions of jack number 01,02,09,10,17
and
18.

Operation

If extensions of jack number 01,02,09,


10, 17
and 18 are connected with a KX-T123220,
KX-T123250, KX-T61620, KX-T61650,
KX-T30825, KX-T30820 or KX-T30850,
disconnect the unit and connect a
KX-T123230, KX-T61631, KX-T61630,
KX-T30830 or a standard telephone.
There is no memory loss except for the camp-on,
saved number redial, the last number redial,
Call park and Message Waiting during power
failure, memory is protected by 21 day
rechargeable
battery.
Rechargeable
battery is good for 5 years.

None

Conditions
l The party whose

handset remains off- hook


will hear a reorder tone to indicate that the
call is disconnected.

Description
Any telephone instrument, whether(KX-T123230,
KX-T123235, KX-T123220, KX-T123250, KX-T61631,
KX-T61630, KX-T61620, KX-T61650,
KX-T30820, KX-T30825, KX-T30830,
KX-T30850 for exclusive use), standard
rotary phone (10 pps, 2Opps), or standard
touch tone phone, may be used as an
extension of the KX-T123211.

Automobile type batteries which are customer


supplied is available as a backup power supply
of the KX-T123211 to operate all the features in the
event of power failure. Refer to page 2-34.
For connecting automobile type batteries, use the
Optional Battery Adaptor KX-A26.
Automobile

type batteries

[ Consisting

Operation
None

of two 12 VDC (24 VDC)]

4-51

Station Programming

To Program
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM.

Paging

All Extensions

(Dial 330).

Dial 330

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

Press
MEMORY
.._..._...

After programming

all the system features,

return the MEMORY

switch to the SET position.

To Access

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

__

Press
PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE

Confirmation
tone of 1 beep
will be heard

Description

-r

Page

To Access
1. Lift the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.
2. Press the PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE
button and wait for confirmation tone
(one beep).
3. Start paging .

Features that can be accessed by using the


dialing button also can be programmed into
memory.
(e.g. Paging All Extensions.)

Operation
To Program
Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.
PITS-PGM
NO ?- will be displayed.
Example:
Paging All Extensions
(Dial 330).
1. Press the PROGRAMMABLE
FEATURE
button.
2. Dial (330).
3. Press MEMORY button.
0 System feature described in the table on
page 6-5 can be programmed into
memory.
After programming
all the numbers,
return
the MEMORY switch to the SET position.
4-52

Prime Line Preference-Outgoing


l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.


switch of the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM.

l Set the MEMORY

Setting

To cancel

Dial
CO number
(01 through 12)

Dial 13

l After programming

Press
MEMORY

Prime Line Preference-Outgoing

Dial 11

mode, return the MEMORY

Press
MEMORY

switch to the

SET position.
Dialing through CO line

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Wait for
CO. dial tone

Dial
phone
number

Description

Dialing through CO line

You can access the prime CO line directly


picking

up the handset

SP-PHONE

or pressing

by

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

the

button.

button.

The CO indicator

Dial tone from CO will be heard.

Operation
l Be sure the handset

SP-PHONE

2. Dial the phone number.

is in the cradle and the

0 To access an extension in the Auto CO

button is off.

l Set the MEMORY

telephone

will be lit green.

Hunting mode, press the ICM button and

switch of the proprietary

then dial the extension number.

to PROGRAM.

Concfitions

Setting
1. Dial (13).

This feature will not function with;a standard

telephone.

Pref. Out : CO- will be displayed.


2. Dial the CO number
3. Press the MEMORY

(01 through

12).

button.

To cancel
1. Dial (11).
Pref. Out : No will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY
l After programming,

MEMORY

button.

return the

switch to the SET position.


4-53

Idle Line Preference-Outgoing


l
l

Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM.
To cancel

Setting

[r;li

pi
Dial 12

After programming
SET position.

pq

61.
Dial 11

Press
MEMOBY

Idle Line Preference-Outgoing

mode, return the MEMORY

Press
MEMORY

switch to the

Dialing through CO line

1..1;9:il
Wait for
CO. dial tone

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

pfl
~~~~~rle

Description

Dialing through CO line

You can access any idle CO line within the CO

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE

line enable to call directly by picking up the

button.

handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.

The CO indicator

will be lit green.

Dial tone from CO will be heard.

Operation
l

Be sure the handset


SP-PHONE

button is off.

Set the MEMORY


telephone

2. Dial the phone number.

is in the cradle and the

Hunting mode, press the ICM button and

switch of the proprietary

then dial the extension number.

to PROGRAM.

Conditions

Setting
1. Dial (12).

This feature will not function with a standard

telephone.

Pref. Out : Idle will be displayed.


2. Press the MEMORY

button.

To cancel
1. Dial (11).
Pref. Out : No will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY

button.

0 After programming,

return the

MEMORY

To access an extension in the Auto CO

switch to the SET position.

4-54

Prime Line Preference-Incoming


l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone
to PROGRAM.

To cancel

Setting

CO number
(01 through 12)

l After programming

Press
MEMORY

Dial 22

Prime Line Preference-Incoming

Press
MEMORY

mode, return the MEMORY

switch to the

SET position.
To answer

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Description

To answer

When incoming calls from the Central Office


are received at the same time, you can receive
the call on the preferred CO line first by only
lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE
button.

Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE


button.
0 If any incoming calls from the Central Office
are received at the same time except for the
preferred CO line, you must lift the handset
or press the SP-PHONE button and then press
the CO button whose indicator is quickly
flashing (red color).

Operation
l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.

Conditions
This feature will not function with a standard

Setting
.
1. Dial (23).
Pref. In : CO- will be displayed.
2. Dial the CO number (01 through 12).
3. Press the MEMORY button.

telephone.

To cancel
1. Dial (22).
Pref. In : Ring will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.
0 After programming,
return the MEMORY
switch to the SET position.

4-55

No Line Preference- tncoming


l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
o Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM.

To cancel

Setting

1 1FY
AUTO

MEMORY

Dial 21 I

l After programming

Press
MEMORY

Press
MEMORY

No Line Preference-Incoming,

return the MEMORY

switch

to the

SET position.
To answer

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Press
CO whose
indicator is
quickly flashing

Description

To answer
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.

If programmed for the No Line PreferenceIncoming mode, the extension user must lift
the handset or press the SP-PHONE button and
then press the flashing CO button.

2. Press the CO button whose indicator


quickly flashing.

is

Operation
Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.
0

Conditions
This feature will not function with a standard
telephone.

Setting
1. Dial (21).
Pref. In : Nowill be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.
To cancel
1. Dial (22).
Pref. In : Ring will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.
l After programming,
return the MEMORY
switch to the SET position.

B
4-56

To Change into Other CO Button

To Assign into Trunk Group Access Button


l

Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM. , .

Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.

Press CO
which you
want to
change into
different
CO button
l

Dial 0

Dial
Press
MEMORY
CO number
which is
set newly
(01 through 12)

Press CO
which you
want to
change into
trunk group
button
l

After programming
all CO buttons, return
the MEMORY switch to the SET position.

Description

Dial
;;;;Ll:ouP

Press
MEMORY

(1 through 8)

After programming all CO buttons, return


the MEMORY switch to the SET position.

Description

Allows each CO button to change into CO


number which is different from printed CO
number.

Allows each CO button to change into


the trunk group access number (81 through 88).

Operation

Operation

Be sure the handset is in the cradle


SP-PHONE button is off.

Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary


telephone to PROGRAM.

and the

1. Press CO button which you want to change


different CO number.
When pressing CO 1 button,
CO-01 will be displayed.

into

Be sure the handset is in the cradle


SP-PHONE button is off.

Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary


telephone to 66~~~~~~~9.

and the

1. Press the CO button which you want to change


into trunk group access number.
2. Dial (I#).
3. Dial the trunk group number (1 through

2. Dial (0).
CO- will be displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY

3. Dial the CO number which is set newly (01


through 12).
When dialing (02),
CO-02 will be displayed.
4. Press the MEMORY

Dial W

button.

o After programming
all CO buttons, return the
MEMORY switch to the SET position.

4-57

8).

button.

After programming all CQ.buttons, return the


MEMORY switch to the SET: position.

To Change into One Touch Dialing Button

To Change into DSS Button


Setting
l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.

which you
want to
change into
DSS button

l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.

extension
MEMORY
number
(100 throughl99)

which you want to


cnange Into
one touch
dialina

m
n

l After programming

the MEMORY

all CO buttons, return


switch to the SET position.

AUTO

Dialing (Inter Office Calling)

p ho?e
numoer

You may dial 81 through


88 instead of 9.

MEMORY

Press
MEMORY

F&I
Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

l After programming

0
Press CO
which has
been changed
into DSS

the MEMORY

Iescription

Description

Allows each CO button to change into the one


touch dialing button.
Up to 16 digits can be stored into each of the 12
CO buttons.

Allows each CO button to change into the DSS


(Direct Station Selection) button.
DSS button can be used instead of dialing a
extension number.

Operation

Operation

l Be sure the handset

Setting
0

Be sure the handset is in the cradle


SP-PHONE button is off.

SP-PHONE

and the

telephone

3. Dial (9).
0

199).

button.

all CO buttons, return the


0 After programming
MEMORY switch to the SET position.

You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9.


9... An extension automatically selects an idle
line within the CO line enable to call.
81 through 88... An extension selects a trunk
group designated.

4. Dial the phone numper.


5. Press the MEMORY

Dialing (Inter Office Calling)


or press the SP-PHONE

switch of the proprietary


to PROGRAMED.

2. Dial (2).

2. Dial (1).
EXT- will be displayed.

4. Press the MEMORY

and the

1. Press the CO button which you want to


change into one touch dialing .
When pressing CO 1 button, CO-01 will
be displayed.

1. Press the CO button which you want to change


into DSS button.
When pressing CO 1 button,
CO-01 will be-displayed.

3. Dial the extension number (100 through


When dialing (120),
EXT-120 will be displayed.

is in the cradle
button is off.

l Set the MEMORY

Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary


telephone to PROGRAM.

1. Lift the handset

all CO buttons, return


switch to the SET position.

0 After programming all CO buttons, return the


MEMORY switch to the SET position.

button.

2. Press the CO button which has been changed


DSS.

button.

into
4-58

0 For dialing,
page 4-4.

refer to One Touch Dialingon

To.

To Change into Message Waiting Button

Change into Other All CO Button

l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.
)

l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.

Dial Y

Press CO
which you want
to change
into other all
CO button

Im/

Press
MEMORY

Press CO 1

all CO buttons, return


switch to the SET position.

Description
Allows only CO 1 button to change into
the message waiting button except the
KX-T123230, KX-T123220, KX-T123250 and
KX-T30830.

Allows CO button to change into all CO numbers


which are not assigned to CO button.

Operation
l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle
button is off.

and the

Operation
l Be sure the handset

l Set the MEMORY

telephone

Press
MEMORY

CO 1 button, return
switch to the SET position.

the MEMORY

Description

SP-PHONE

Dial 3

l After programming

l After programming

the MEMORY

m-B1

switch of the proprietary


to PROGRAM.

SP-PHONE

is in the cradle
button is off.

and the

l Set the MEMORY

1. Press the CO button which you want to change


into other all CO numbers.
When pressing CO 1 button,
CO-01 will be displayed.

telephone

switch of the proprietary


to PROGFWM.

1. Press CO 1 button.
2. Dial (3).

2. Dial &).
Other CO key will be displayed.

3. Press the MEMORY

button.

l After programming

3. Press the MEMORY

button.

MEMORY

CO 1 button, return the


switch to the SET position.

l For operation,

all CO buttons, return the


0 After programming
MEMORY switch to the SET position.

on page 4-37.

4-59

refer to Message

Waiting

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone
to PROGRAM.

Setting (Voice Alerting Mode)

Dial 42

l After programming

To cancel (Setting Tone Alerting Mode)

Dial 41

Press
MEMORY

Intercom

Voice Alerting

Mode,

return the MEMORY

Press
MEMORY

switch to the SET position.

To answer
When an intercom

Voice
alerting
is heard

call reaches

Lift handset
or press
SP-PHONE

Description
The intercom alerting mode (tone/voice) at a
receiving extension can be selected through
programming.
VOICE...Voice
alerting instead of Tone alerting
is heard through the speaker on the
receiving extension.
TONE .-. Tone alerting (ringing) sound at the
receiving extension.

Operation
l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.
Setting (Voice Alerting Mode)
1. Dial (42).
Voice Call will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.
To cancel (Setting Tone Alerting Mode)
1. Dial (41).
Tone Call will be displayed.
2. Press the MEMORY button.
l After programming,
return the MEMORY
switch to the SET position.

Talk

To answer
1. When an intercom call reaches, voice
alerting is heard.
2. Lift the handset or press the SP-PHONE
button.
3. Start talking.

Conditions
This feature will not function with a standard
telephone.

To

Change into Other DSS Button

To change into One Touch Dialing Button


l Be sure the handset

l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone paired with the DSS console or
KX-T30830 to PROGRAM.

is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone paired with the DSS console or
KX-T30830 to PROGRAM.

Press DSS
which you
want to
change into
different
extension
number

Dial 1

Press DSS
which you want
to change into
one tout h
dialing

Dial
Press
MEMORY
extension
number
which is
set newly
(1Cl0through 199)

Dial 2

Dial
phone
number

l You may dial 81 through

88 instead of 9.

l After programming

the MEMORY

Dial 9

all DSS buttons, return


switch to the SET position.
Press
MEMORY

l After programming

Description

the MEMORY
Allows each DSS button to change into extension
number which is different from default extension
number.
KX-T30830, KX-T123240 or KX-T61640 only is
available.

Description
Allows each DSS button to change into the one
touch dialing button.
Up to 16 digits KX-T30830, KX-T123240 or
KX-T61640 only is available.

Operation
Setting

Operation

Be sure the handset is in the cradle


SP-PHONE button is off.

Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary


telephone paired with the DSS console or
KX-T30830 to PROGRAM.

and the

1. Press DSS button which you want to change


different extension number.

into

Be sure the handset is in the cradle


SP-PHONE button is off.

Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary


telephone paired with the DSS console or
KX-T30830 to PROGRAM.

2. Dial (2).

3. Dial the extension number which is set newly


(100 through 199).

3. Dial (9).
0 You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9.
9... An extension can automatically select an
idle line within the CO line enable to call.
81 through 88... An extension can select a
trunk group designated.

button.

0 After programming all DSS buttons, r&Urn


MEMORY switch to the SET position.

and the

1. Press the DSS button which you want to


change into one touch dialing.

2. Dial (1).

4. Press the MEMORY

all DSS buttons, return


switch to the SET position.

the

0 When the KX-T30830 is connected to the


KX-T123211, enter DSS Number or One Touch
Dialing Button to DSS button certainly.

4. Dial the phone number.


5. Press the MEMORY

button.

all DSS buttons, return


0 After programming
the MEMORY switch to the SET position.

4-61

0 For dialing,
page 4-4.

refer to One Touch Dialingon

?_

To Change into Message Waiting Button


0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the
SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.

l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
l Set the MEMORY switch of the KX-T30830 to
PROGRAM.

DEF

AUTO

al

lib

/oi

-0
Continue to dial
CO numbers
which you
want to ring
(01 through 12)

Dial 3

Press
MEMORY

Press
DSSll

l After programming
l After programming

DSS 11 button, return


the MEMORY switch to the SET position.

Selection,return
SET position.

MEMORY

Press
MEMORY

CO Line Ringing
the MEMORY switch to the

Description
Through

programming

can select whether

Description

when an outside

Allows only DSS 11 button of the KX-T30830


change into the message waiting button.
The KX-T30830 only is available.

the extension

call reaches

you

ring or not

through the CO

line.

to

Program

the CO numbers

ring.Flexible

Ringing

which you want to

Assignmenton

page

3-54 should be set to Enable.

Operation
l Be sure the handset

is in the cradle
button is off.

SP-PHONE

l Set the MEMORY

Operation

and the

l Be sure the handset

SP-PHONE

switch of the KkT30830

telephone

1. Press the DSS 11 button of the KX-T30830.

is in the cradle

and the

button is off.

l Set the MEMORY

to PROGRAM.

switch of the proprietary

to PROGRAM.

1. Dial (3).

2. Dial (3).
3. Press the MEMORY

2. Continue to dial the CO numbers want to ring


(01 through 12).

button.

3. Press the MEMORY

l After programming

MEMORY

the CO numbers,

DSS 11 button, return the


switch to the SET position.

l For operation,

refer to Message

l After programming

Selection,

Waiting on

button.
CO Line Ringing

return the MEMORW switch to the

SET position.

page 4-37.

Conditions
0

As all programmed CO numbers are not


displayed, press the + (FWD/DND) or c
(CONF) button for scrolling the Display.

0 When an outside

call reaches through the CO


line doesnt ring, the CO indicator will flash. If
you want to answer the outside call, press the
flashing CO button.

4-62

l
l

Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM.

Enter
year

Dial 0

Enter
month

Enter
day

(01 through 12)

(last 2 digits)

Dial

(01 through.31)

-..-.
--..
1
day of
the week
r 660,,: for SUN
1 : for MON
2 : for TU E
3 : for WED

4 : for THU
5 : for FRI
6 : for SAT

Enter
hour

(01 through 12)

Enter
minute
(00 through 59)

-+

After setting

Press
MEMORY

-.-,
nial

0 or 1
0 : for AM
1 : for PM

Date and Time Setting,

1
return the MEMORY

Description

switch to the SET position.

5. Dial the day of the week

When the present


adjust by following

time is out of order, you can

(0 through 6).

procedure.

0 : for Sunday
1 : for Monday

Operation
l

SP-PHONE
l

2 : for Tuesday

Be sure the handset

is in the cradle

and the

3 : for Wednesday

button is off.

4 : for Thursday

Set the MEMORY switch of the KX-Tl23235


or KX-Tl23230

5 : for Friday

to PROGRAM.

6 : for Saturday

1. Dial (0).

6. Enter the hour with 2 digits

2. Enter the year (last 2 digits).

(01 through

3. Enter the month with 2 digits


(01 through

12).

7. Enter the minute (00 through 59).

12).

6. Dial the 0 or 1.

4. Enter the day wjth 2 digits (01 through 31).

0 : for AM
[ 1 : for PM
9. Press the MEMORY
l

After setting,

return the MEMORY

the SETposition.

4-63

button.
switch to

Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.

Dial #

0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM::
._

Dial w

PressMEMORY

l After clearing,

return the MEMORY


to the SET position.

switch
ma
Dial 8

Description
l Pressing

(# * MEMORY)

programs

will reset station

on an extension

to the default

data.
l Auto CO Hunting

You can cancel the Electronic Station Lock of all


extensions.
This feature only is done through extension
connected to jack number 01.

Idle Line Preference-Outgoing


Answering

After canceling the Electronic Station Lock,


return the MEMORY switch to the SET
position.

Description

Prime Line Preference-Outgoing


l Automatic

Press
MEMORY

Selection

Prime Line Preference-Incoming


No Line Preference-Incoming
l Intercom

Voice Alerting

0 CO Line Ringing
l Call Waiting
l F3-One

Mode

Operation

Selection

0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the

Tone Selection

SP-PHONE button is off.


0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.

Touch Button Mode Selection

1. Dial (8).

Operation
l Be sure the handset

SP-PHONE

2. Press the MEMORY

button is off.

l Set the MEMORY

telephone

is in the cradle and the

0 After canceling the Electronic Station Lock,


return the MEMORY switch to the SET
position.

switch of the proprietary

to PROGRAM.

1. Dial (#).
2. Dial (*).
3. Press the MEMCRY
l After clearing,

button.

return the MEMORY

button.

switch

to the SET position.

4 - 66

l Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the SP-PHONE button is off.
e Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary telephone to PROGRAM.

To record

m
Dial 9

Lift handset

Dial 2

0 Message which is recorded is played


back automatically after press the
MEMORY button.

Give
message

Press
MEMORY

To play back only

Dial 1

Dial 9

l After recording

or confirming,

Will hear
message

return the MEMORY

switch to the SET position.

Description

To play back only


1. Dial (9)
Outgoing Message will be displayed.

Enables recording of message that answers


calls on the CO line set to DISA mode.
The record time is max. 31 seconds. One
message can be recorded.

2. Dial (1)
Playback : 00 will be displayed
Message is played back and then count will
start.

Programming

l After recording

0 Be sure the handset is in the cradle and the


SP-PHONE button is off.
0 Set the MEMORY switch of the proprietary
telephone to PROGRAM.
To record
1. Dial (9).
Outgoing

MEMORY

or confirming, return the


Switch to the SET position.

Condition
0 If you exceed the max. time of recording (31
seconds), Recording is automatically
and Playback is started.
_

i
Message will be displayed.

stopped

0 Optional Outgoing Message Card and Direct


Inward System Access Cards are necessary.

2. Lift the handset


3. Dial (2) and then give the message.
Record : 00 will be displayed and then
count will start.

If a power failure takes place for about 10 days,


OGM will vanish. Then Record OGM will be
displayed and blink on the LCD of the extension
connected to jack no. 1.
Please record OGM again.

4. When finished, press the MEMORY button.


Playback: 00 will be displayed and
message that was recorded is played back
automatically.

4 - 67

OPERATION OF A STANDARD TELEPHONE


- c
(rotary and touch tone phones)
Making Calls
Description
There are 100 memory locations
speed dialing available.

Description
Station to station dialing
KX-T123211 system.

within the

of system

Operation

Operation
Lift handset

Dial speed
access code (00 through 99)

There is no need to access a CO line.


A rotary phone will not function for
speed dialing
l Continuous
use of speed dialing is
impossible.

;z;ia;ension

Lift
handset

Dial C

l
(100 through 199)

Automatic Line Access

Description

Description

You can call the doorphone within the


KX-Tl23211 system.

Each extension can automatically


select an
idle line within the CO (Central Office) line
enable to call.

ODeration
Doorphone 1

Operation

Dial 311

Lift handset
Dial 9

Lift
handset

Individual

Wait for
C.O. dial tone

Doorphone 2

Dial phone
number

Trunk GrouD Access

,~

Description

Lift handset

Each extension can automatically


select an
idle CO line within the same trunk group.
Through programming,
12 CO lines can be
divided up to 8 groups. See the page 3-52.

Operation

Description
You can call the operator within the
KX-T123211 system.
This feature is required to be set
beforehand in the KX-T123211. For
programming, see page 3-9.

8
cl
TUV

Dial 8
handset

Dial 312

You can not dial to doorphone from Off


Premise Extension (OPX).
0 Up to two doorphones (KX-T30865) can be

Dial trunk
group
number
(1 through 8)

Wait for
C.O. dial
tone

Lift
handset

Dial phone
number

5-I

Dial 0

In case one operator


have only to dial 0.

Dial 0
or 1

is programmed,

you

When a Line is Busy

Description

Description
If the extension you have dialed is busy, or
outside line (CO line) you have selected is busy,
the call will be automatically called back to you
when the extension or the outside line becomes
free using this function.
This feature is also known as camp-on.

If the extension you have dialed is busy, you


can inform the extension that another
intercom call is incoming with three beeps.
If the extension you have dialed is
KX-T123235, you can inform the extension
through the speaker.

Operation

Operation

For Outside Calls

Dial trunk
grow
number
(l- thioug h 8)

Dial 8

You will
hear a
busy tone
.

Dial
extension
number
yi;
through

Dial 6

Confirmation
tone

Hang

up

0 You may dial 9 instead of 8 and trunk group


number.
For Intercom

Dial
extension
number
7;;
through

Calls

You will
hear a busy
tone

Dial 6

You will
hear a
busy tone

Dial 1
and wait for
an answer

To answer your signal, see Call Waiting


on page 5-5.
While the other party is set for Call
Waiting Tone-From Extension Deny on
page 5- 15 or is using a data terminal
equipment, you may not be able to use
this feature. (A reorder tone is heard
after dialing 1.)

Confirmation
tone

Description
The last phone number dialed on an
outside line (CO line) can be redialed.

Operation
Hang

up

When hearing

Lift
handset

a ring back

0 When making an intercom call,


you will hear a ring back tone.
0 When making an outside call, you
will hear the dial tone from the

handset

co.

A call back busy cannot be activated on


an extension which has a call on hold.

5-2

You may dial 80 instead of pressing


the sf button.
*

Receiving

When a Line is BUSY (cont.)

Calls

Operation
Description
Allows an extension user to intrude into
another extension that is in conversation
with an outside or inside party.
This feature is required to be set
beforehand in the KX-T123211.
For programming
see page 3-74.

Operation

Lift
handset

Dial
extension
number
v;; through

Lift
handset

pJ*.. \.....
II
You will
hear a busy
tone

Description
An extension user can answer any ringing
extension within their own extension group.

Operation

Dial 2
A 3-party
Conference
is now
established

ml 0
GHI

Lift
handset

If the other party is using data equipment or


is set for Executive Override DenyExtension on page 5-l 5, you can not intrude
into the other party that is in conversation.
(A recorder tone is heard after dialing 2.)

OPER

Dial 40

Description
An extension may answer an incoming
that is ringing at another extension
regardless of the extension group.

call

Operation

Lift
handset

Dial 4

Dial ringing
extension
number
(1 OOthrough
199)

0
4
2
P

5-3

Receiving

Calls

While Having a
Conversati6n
-

(cont.)

Description
Description

An extension user can place up to ten calls


in the park zones.
This allows any extension user to retrieve a
parked call (intercom or outside) at any
extension.

If you wish to leave your phone unattended


but want the caller you are in(co_nversation
with to wait, call on hold may be used.
Intercom or outside calls may be on hold.

Operation

Operation

To Park a Call

To Place a Call on Hold


l

Flash
hookswitch

pn;firmation

Confirmation
tone

Hang up

Dial

Dial parking
station
number
(20 through 29)

Confirmation
tone of
2 beeps
will
be heard

Flash
hookswitch

Do not depress
the hookswitch
for more than
one second, or
the party will be
disconnected.

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after flashing of
the hookswitch. If any number except 20 is
dialed, the party will be disconnected.

0 If a busy tone is heard after the parking


station number is dialed, dial only the last
1 digit of another parking station number.
(0 through 9).
0 Do not depress the hookswitch for more
than one second, or party will be
disconnected.

To Cancel

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after flashing of
the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except 20 is
dialed, the party will be disconnected.

Flash
hookswitch

To Retrieve a Call on Hold from Another


Extension

To Retrieve a Parked Call at Any Other


Extension
Lift
handset

Lift
handset

Operation

Lift
handset

Dial

Dial parking
station
number
(20 through 29)

This feature is required to be set


beforehand in the KX-Tl23211.
For programming, see page 3-76.

Off Premise Extension (OPX) does


not receive call from the doorphone.

5-4

Dial 5

Dial holding
extension
number
1:; through

In case held call is outside call, you may


dial 53 and then held CO line number
.
i
(01 through 12).

While Having a conversation


Description

Description
Allows for a three party conference,
(2-outside/ 1 -inside) (1 -outside/2-inside)
(34nside).

ODeration

Flash
hookswitch
leave 1st
party on hold

(cont.)

Dial 2nd
pafly
number

\I
hal\
ml

Consult
with 2nd
party

Call Waiting tones during a conversation


indicates there is a new incoming outside
/
call or Intercom call.
This feature has been set beforehand in
the exte nsion.

or

Operation
Flash
hookswitch
Will hear
a call
waiting
tone

Flash
hookswitch
leave 1st
p;y
on

Hang

up

Lift
handset

Dial 3

Consult
with
new caller
while 1st
r;);;;y is on

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after first flashing
of the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except 20 is
dialed, the first party will be disconnected.

To leave one caller on Hold and Talk to the


Other Caller

Flash
hookswitch

If you use the hold button of a standard


telephone, the above-mentioned
feature
will not function.

To terminate the original call and return


to the 2nd call, hang up and then lift the
handset. (You need not flash the
hookswitch.)

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after first flashing
of the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except ?$I is
dialed, the first party will be,disconnected.

2nd party
on hold 1 st
party in
consultation

5-5

While Having a Conversation

(cont.)

Description

Description
Allows the station user to alternate
two parties, intercom and outside.

Outside or intercom calls may be


transferred to any extension manually.
A call can not be transferred to outside
line.

between

Operation

Operation
To Transfer After the Other Extension
Flash
hookswitch

Dial second
paw

Consult
with
2nd party while
1st party is on
hold

Flash
hookswitch
Flash
hookswitch

Dial
extension
number

Announce
and wait for
an answer

To Transfer without Announcing


Extension
2nd party
on hold 1st
party in
consultation

Flash
hookswitch

Answers

Hang

up

the Other

1 st party on
hold 2nd party
in consultation

Flash
hookswitch

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after first flashing
of the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except 20 is
dialed, the first party will be disconnected.

Dial
extension
number

Hang

up

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after flashing of
the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except 20 is
dialed, the party will be disconnected.
To Retrieve the Call
If the other extension did not answer the
transferred call within 30 seconds after the call
has been transferred, the call will return to
you. In this case:
While the ring back is hearing,
l

Lift
handset

The time that the callreturns to


you when the transferred call is
not answered can be changed
from 30 seconds to 15 seconds.
For changing, see page 3-27.

To change the party to whom a call is


transferred before hanclina UD
.

Flash
hookswitch
to retrieve
call
5-6

Flash
hookswitch

::I;;ension

Paging

Description

Description
Allows paging all extensions
paging equipment..

Allows paging all extensions.,

and external

Operation
To Access

Operation
To access
Lifl
handset
Lift handset

Dial 33 *

330

Confirmation
tone of 1
beep will
be heard

Page

Page

Dial

Wait for an
answer
and
talk

0 Page will be heard from the built-in speaker


of proprietary telephones and external paging
equipment.

Confirmation
tone of
1 beep will
be heard

Wait for
an answer
and talk

Paging will be heard only from the


built-in speaker of KX-T123235,
KX-T123230, KX-T123220,
KX-T123250, etc.
It will not be heard from the built-in
speaker of a standard telephone.

Description
l

You may dial (32~) instead of (33~).

Allows paging to one of eight extension


groups.

Operation
To Access

Lift
handset

Confirmation
tone

5-7

Dial 33

Page

Wait for an
answer
and talk

Paging
Description

(cont.)

Description

Allows access to external

paging equipment.

A page from the built-in speaker or


external paging equipment can be
..
answered from any extension

Operation
To Access
ABC

Lift
handset

Operation

ml
DEF

from Built-in

Speaker

Dial external
paging number

Dial 32

Confirmation
tone of 1 beep
will be heard
Confirmation
tone

External
0: for
1: for
2: for

Page

Wait for an
answer
and
talk

paging number
external paging equipments
equipment 1.
equipment 2.

Talk

1 and 2.

To Paaina

from External Eaubment

ml
1
GHI

Paging will be heard from external


paging equipment.
0 Up to two external paging
equipment can be connected to
the KX-T123211.

ABC

.4
Lift

Dial 42

Confirmation
tone

Operation
To Transfer

Flash hookswitch
to olace a call
onhold

Page

a Call to the Paged Person

Dial 330

pn;firmatior

Wait for an
answer
and
hang up

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after flashing of
the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except 20 is
dialed, the party will be disconnected.
5-8

Talk

Dial external
paging
number

External pagings
number
1I: for external
paging 1.
2: for external
paging 2.

Use of Other Features

Description

Description

Allow you to dial to the extension on which


Do Not Disturb is set.
This feature is required to be set beforehand
in the KX-Ti 23211.. For programming, see
page 3-75.

Allows extension user to access features of


the central office or host PBX. (example:
call waiting feature can be supplied by the
central office.)
0 This external feature (call waiting) can
only be accessed when on an outside call.

Dia,
Lift
handset

Do not
disturb
tone
is heard

extension
number
1$99through

Operation
Call Waiting-Outside

Ring back
tone is heard
and wait
for answer

Description
Voice alerting (through built-in speaker)
that is established at the called partys
extension, can beswitched to Tone alerting
(ringing).
l This feature is required to be set
beforehand at the called partys extension.
For programing, see page 4-60.
l A rotary phone will not function.

Wait until a
confirmation
tone is heard

Press

Ring
tone

Will hear a
call waiting
tone

Flash
hookswitch

Consult
with
new caller
while original
call is placed
on hold

Flash
hookswitch

Dial 6

Dial 6

Consult
with
original
caller while
2nd call is
placed
on hold

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after the first
flashing of the hookswitch in addition to the
above procedure. If any number except 20 is
dialed, the original call will be disconnected.

Fi
*

While in
conversation

Flashing the hookswitch and dialing 6


means flash operation.
0 If the KX-Tl23211 is connected to a host
PBX and a flash operation is required,
follow the procedure of flash operation
which is required for the host PBX.

to Tone Alerting

pq

Line

Operation

Fj

shows you one of

Dial 1

Q**
.. \.....
l-!-l

Switching

The following example


the procedures.

back

You should press V button within 10


seconds after the dialing.

5-9

Use of Other Features


Description

n Receiving

This feature has two modes Forced and


Option. In the Forced mode, the
account code must be entered every time
the extension user dials. In the Option
mode, account code may be entered when
a record of the account code is needed.
When setting to the Forced mode, see
page 3-71.

mpq
Flash
hookswitch

n Making or Receiving

Dial 9

Dial k

Wait
C.O.
tone

for
dial
.

a Call

If you want to record a calling or called


partys account code in the SMDR, follow
the below-mentioned
procedure.
Within 30 seconds after calling or called
party hangs up,

Again

Flash
hookswitch
Dial
telephone
number

[ 1
Account
code is
4 digits.

Dial account
code

Option Mode

aI Call

Intermittent
tone is
heard.

Dial
account
code

Again

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after flashing of
the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except 20 is
dialed, the party will be disconnected.

Forced Mode

Lift
handset

Dial k

Dialing the account code must be done


before hanging up.

Operation

n Making

a Call

If you want to record a calling partys


account code in the SM DR, follow the
below-mentioned
procedure;
Within 30 seconds after calling party hangs
up,

This feature gives each message of the


SMDR an account code of the called or
calling party.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR
is cost saving feature that records all
incoming and outgoing calls through the
CO line.

(cont.)

*
l
Dial

Again
.I

Dial
account
code
I

Dialing the account code must oe aone


before hanging up.

[ 1

When the Call on Hold for Standard


Telephone on page 3-77 is placed in the
Hold-2 mode, dial 20 after flashing of
the hookswitch in addition to the above
procedure. If any number except 20 is
dialed, the party will be disconnected.

You may dial 81 through 88 instead of


dialing 9.

0 You may dial 49 instead of pressing the-,


jt s button.
0 Account code require 4 numerical digits
except for the tf and * buttons.
0 If you enter a wrong account code, press
the Jo jc button and enter the correct
code.
5-10

Account
code is
4 digits.

Use of Other Features


n You may dial 0 instead of pressing

(cont.)
-

the #I button.

Description
Description

Each extension can be individually


prohibited from receiving intercom and
outside calls.

Allows you to prohibit any other extension


user from answering calls directed to you.

Operation
Setting

Operation
Settina
Lift
handset

Dial 714W

Lift

Hang

Hang

Dial 721sf

up

To Cancel

up

To Cancel

(~~~F-Jj

Lift
handset

Dial 71 OW

Lift
handset

Hang

Hang

Dial 720#

up

5-11

up

Use of Other Features

(cont.)

Description

Description
All intercom calls to your extension can be
automatically forwarded to any extension
within the system.
For outside calls to your extension, if your
extension is programmed for the Direct In
Line (DIL) or the call is the CO line which is
programmed for the DISA, the outside calls
can be automatically forwarded to any
extension within the system.
For programming of the DIL or DISA mode,
see page 3-57.

If your extension is busy or do not answer a


call within 3 rings, all intercom calls to your
extension can be automaticallyfojwarded
to
any extension within the system..
For outside calls to your extension, if your
extension is programmed for the Direct In
Line (DIL) or the call is the CO line which is
programmed for the DISA, the outside calls
can be automatically forwarded to any
extension within the system.
1 ring or 2 rings or 4 rings by programming
(see page 3-28).

Operation
Setting

Operation

piY=iiq
Dial 711

lift
handset

Settinn

Dial
extension
number
(119099through

Dial 712

Lift
handset

Dial

Hang

#
l

up

To Cancel

Dial #

Hang

up

To Cancel
Dial 710#

Lift
handset

Dial 71Off

Lift
handset

Hang

up

Hang

5-12

up

Dial
extension
number

Use of Other Features

Description

(cont.)

Description

Intercom calls to your extension can be


automatically forwarded to any outside line.
For outside calls to your extension, if your
extension is programmed for the Direct In Line
(DIL) or the call is the CO line which is
programmed for the DISA, the outside calls
can be automatically forwarded to any outside
line. For programming of the DIL or DISA
mode, see page 3-57. This feature is required
to be set beforehand in the KX-T123211. For
programming, see page 3-73.

Absent message (Message 1 through 6) which


are programmed can informed to-an inside
calling party.
Programming can be done at any telephone
(either proprietary telephones or standard
telephones).
When a caller using the proprietary telephone
with LCD dials the extension in which the
message is programmed, the message will be
displayed on the LCD.

Operation

Operation

Setting

Setting

n Message

1. Will Return Soon

WXY
a
Dial

Lift handset

713

Dial

9
,
9

Lift handset

Dial phone
number

Dial W

Hang

Hang

n Message

Lift handset

Hang
71 O#

Dial #I

up

To Cancel

Dial

751

up

You may dial 81 through 88 instead of 9.


9: _________-----------An extension can
automatically select an idle
line within the CO line
enable to call.
81 through 88:--- An extension can select a
trunk group designated.
You can not dial 0 instead of pressing the
# button.

Lift handset

Dial

Hang

up

If outside call is forwarded to any outside


line, the KX-T123211 will disconnect the call
from the line after 10 minutes. For changing
the time, see CO to CO Duration Time
Limit on page 3-30.
3 beeps tone will be heard every 5 seconds
for 15 seconds before the call is
disconnected
from the line.
5-13

up

2. Gone Home

Dial

752

Dial

Use of Other Features


n Message

3. At Ext. 123
extension

Dial #

H Message

Hang

Lift handset

up

Dial

#
Dl
Dial #

755

Enter
month
Khrough

Hang

up

4. Back at lo:23 AM

TT=AM/PM
L minute
hour

n Message

Lift harldset
Dial 754

Lift
handset

Enter
%

Enter
minutes
(OOthrough
59)

Lday
month

Dial
extension
number

Enter day
(01 through
31)

n Message

5. Out Until 10/23


--

number

Dial 753

Lift handset

(cont.1

Dial 0 or
I

lo#
Dial #

Dial 756

Dial 9

hour
through

Hang

Hang

6. In a Meeting

up

up

To Cancel the message

Lift handset

Hang

5-14

up

Dial 750

Dial #I

Use of Other Features

(cont.)

To Allow Extension

Description
During a conversation, a call waiting tone
will be heard when a third party on an
outside line or intercom calls you.
Call waiting tone can be removed
at a customers request.
Default is Allow.

Operation

Lift handset

Dial 73

ml

Hang

Dial l#

Dial

WER
ml0 #

Dial 1

73

Hang

up

To Allow CO Call Waiting Tone


1
I

Allows you to prohibit another extension


user from intruding into your conversation
with an outside or inside party.
For programming
of the intrusive extension,
see Executive Override on page 3-74.
Default is Allow.

Operation
To Deny Executive

Override

Dial 1

Dial 73

ml

PRS

DEF

ml

l#

Lift handset
Hang

Dial l#

To Deny Extension

Dial 73

up

Call Waiting Tone

Dial O#P

Hang

Executive
Lift handset

up

Description

Dial O#

Lift handset

Dial 2

1s

To Deny CO Call Waiting Tone

Lift handset

Call Waiting Tone

Dial 73

up

Override

Dial 2

pqq
Lift handset

Dial O#

Hang

r0
;51
TXJ
1;

Dial 73

up

Dial l#

Hang

up

Use of Other Features

Description

(cont.)

Description

Locking an extension prohibits the other user


from dialing to an outside line using it until
unlocked, such as when leaving your seat
for a while.

If a time is set, an alarm tone wiU sound at the


- I
preset time.

Operation

Operation

To lock

Setting
PRS

MN0

ml
Lift handset

Dial 77

Lift handset

Dial
hour
(01 through

Dial 76

12)

I
Dial #

Hang

Lift handset

up

Dial 77

Hang

-+

Dial lock
code

Dial
0 or 1

59)

#
Dl
Dial #

To

Dial #

Enter
minute
(00 through

0 : for AM
1 : for PM

Hang

Dial
1 or 2

IC

1 : only one day


2 : every day

up

Cancel

up
Lift handset

0 Lock code must be 3 numerical digits except


for the #and JC button.
Hang

up

To stoD the Alarm tone

Lift handset

5-16

Dial 762W

Use of Other Features

Description

(cont.)

Description

This feature provides security when


transmitting data through an extension of the
KX-Tl23211.
Executive override, Call waiting tone and Hold
time reminder tone from the KX-T123211 are
prohibited in this mode.

Dialing (79#) will reset the following


station Features on an extension to
the default data.
Call Forwarding
Data Line Security
Dial Call Pickup Deny
Do not Disturb
Call Waiting Tone From CO / Extension
Pick up Dial
Absent Message Capability
Executive Override Deny
Timed Reminder

Operation
Setting

Deny

Operation
Lift handset

Dial

Dial 0

73

Lift handset

Dial W

Hang

up

Dial 79#

KX-T123211

Hang

up

KX-T123211

To Cancel

mp?vq
Lift handset

Dial 73

Data terminal
provided
with

I
L

!he

telephone

equipment.

-L--J.
xanoard

Telephone

tt
PP
Dial 0

Dial O#

unprovided
with
the telephone
Hang

equipment

up

5-17

This mode cannot prevent external call


waiting tone from coming into KX-T123211
system. We recommend that this mode is
established on a line which has no special
telephone company services.

Use of Other Features

(cont.)

Description
Picking up the handset automatically
programmed phone number.

dials a

To Dial
,
-

&

Operation
To Program

Pickup
handset
for 3-seconds

p&q

pijy

Dial

Lift
handset

742

If the Pickup Dial feature did not work, hang


up for 2 seconds, and lift the handset again.

Dial
extension
number

The 3 seconds may be changed to 1 second, 2


seconds or 4 seconds by programming.
(See
page 3-29)
l A rotary phone will not usable for Pickup
Dial.
l Dialing (speed dialing and manual dialing) is
possible within 3 (1,2 or 4) seconds.
When you program for an outside call, enter
the line access number,@] [*],account
code),and then the desired number.
l The pickup dial will not be activated by
picking up the handset during a hold or
when receiving a call.
l You can not dial 0 instead of pressing the
# button.
o Up to 32 digits can be stored.
l The JC
button is used as the PAUSE.
l

p?iQijq
Dial #

Hang

up

You may dial 9 or 81 through 88 and


phone number instead of extension
number.
9... An extension automatically selects an idle
line within the CO line enable to call.
81 through 88... An extension selects a trunk
group designated.

To Enable or Disable
To enable pickup dial

Lift
handset

To disable

Dial 741#

Hang

up

Dial 740#

Hang

up

pickup dial

handset

5-18

TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEM
Extension

does not operate.

PROBABLE

CAUSE

Bad printed circuit board


(LC-Card)
Bad connection between
system and extension

Improper

the

POSSIBLE SOLUTION
Exchange printed circuit board for another
/
printed circuit board.
- >
Take that extension and plug it into the same
extension port using a short telephone cord.
If telephone does not work, connection between
the system and the extension must be repaired.

A telephone with an A-Al


relay is connected.

Use a 2 wires cord.


Set the A-Al relay switch of the telephone
OUT or OFF position.

Bad extension

Take that extension and plug it into another


extension port that is working. If the telephone
does not work, replace the phone.

reset operation

to

Press the Reset Button.


Induced noise on the wire
between the System and the
Amplifier.

Use a shielded cable as the connection


between the System and Amplifier.
A short shielded cable is recommended.

Volume distortion from


external music source

Excessive input level from


external music source

Decrease the Output level of the external music


source by using the Volume Control on the music
source.

Speed dialing or One Touch


Dialing dose not function.

Bad programming

Enter the line access code (9) or trunk group


access code (81 through 88) into programming.

A dial tone (short tone


continuously) was heard
and telephone line hung up
at once when accessing an
outside during the
speakerphone
mode.

The host PBX may have


caused the line to hang up
when the KX-T123211 was
connected to it.

Use the handset instead of the speakerphone.

Noise in external

paging

6-l

wire

Connection

between the KX-Tl23211

and the Proprietary telephone

CAUSE

Can you dial an


extension

SOLiJTiON

The T/R is connected


Dl/D2.

KX-Tl23211

to the

extension

The Pl/P2 is connected


the Dl/D2.

extension

CAUSE

SOLUTION

The T/R is connected


Dl/D2.

Use the correct cord&(2 wires


second from the outside for Dl/D2
and the outer 2 wires are for Pl/P2)

between the KX-Ti 23211 and a standard -telephone.

I
Yes

to

KX-Tl23211
Connection

Use the correct cord (inner 2 wires


are for T/R and the outer 2 wires are
for Dl/D2)

KX-Tl23211

Connection

to the

Use the correct cord (inner 2 wires


are for T/R).
0 If a telephone equipped with an
A-Al relay is connected to the
KX-Ti 23211, set the A-Al
relay switch of the telephone to
OFF.

extension

between

the KX-Tl2321

I and a standard

CAUSE

Connection

to the

Reverse the connections

between the Central Office and the KX-Tl23211


I

CO lines are connected


the Dl/D2.

Can you dial out


on an CO line

w
I

of the T/R.

extension

CAUSE

No

that is polarity sensitive.

SOLUTION

The T is connected
R.

KX-Tl23211

telephone

43
1

CO line

KX-=

6-2

to

I
l T
OR

SOLUTION
Reconnect the CO lines to the T/R
of the telephone jack using
2-conductor wiring.

PROBLEM
Extension does not operate.

PROBABLE

CAUSE

The Power failure switch of


the KX-T123230, KX-T123235
KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or
KX-T30830 is set to ON.

POSSIBLE

SOLUTION-

Set the Power failure switch to OFF.

,
When the headset is not used, se<Ihe HANDSET/
HEADSET selector to the HANDSET position.

When using the


speakerphone
mode,
nothing is heard.

The HANDSET/ HEADSET


selector of the KX-T123230,
KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or
KX-T30830 is set to the
HEADSET position.

The unit does not ring.

*Ringer Volume Selector is


set to OFF.
l The CO numbers are not
programmed.

@Set to HIGH or LOW.

l The Power failure switch of

l Set the Power failure switch to ON.

During a power
interruption,
extensions connected to
jack number 1,2,9,10,17
and 18 do not operate.

the KX-T123230, KX-Tl23235


KX-T61631, KX-T61630 or
KX-T30830 is set to OFF.
l The dialing mode (tone or
pulse) is improper.
.KX-Tl23220,
KX-T123250,
KX-T61620, KX-T61650,
KX-T30820, KX-T30825 or
KX-T30850 is connected.

l Set the Tone/Pulse

switch to the other position.

l Disconnect

KX-T123220, KX-T123250,
KX-T61620, KX-T61650, KX-T30820,
KX-T30825 or KX-T30850 and connect the
KX-T123230, KX-T61631, KX-T61630,
KX-T30830 or a standard telephone.

Note

If the system does not operate properly, use the Reset


Button.

If the system does not operate properly, push the


Reset Button.
If the system does not work, switch the power off and
on again after 5 minutes. If the system still does not work,
switch the power off.
The following extensions will be directly connected
to each of the central office lines (C.O.).

l Before using the Reset Button, try the system

feature again to confirm whether there definitely is


a problem or not.
l Pressing the Reset button will cause the
followings.
i
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

l See CO Line Ringing Selection on page 4-62.

Camp-on is cleared.
Last number redial is cleared.
Saved number redial is cleared.
Calls on hold are terminated.
Calls on exclusive hold are terminated.
Calls in progress are terminated.
Call park is cleared.
Message Waiting is cleared.

Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension
Extension

connected
connected
connected
connected
connected
connected

to
to
to
to
to
to

jack
jack
jack
jack
jack
jack

number01
number02
number09
number 10
number17
number18

If the automobile type battery is connected


system, disconnect it.
*

Data that are stored in memory except above


mentioned will not be cleared by use of the Reset
Button.

6-3

...... CO 1
...... CO 2
.. .. .. CO 5
...... CO 6
. . .. .. CO 9
. . ... . CO10
to the
.

i . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . until the desired

To set

DTMF receiver

appears

until desired mode appears


Enable . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . default
Disable

:.....................................................

To confirm
Dial any extension

(100 through

A= q

: to assign to same of all 3 receivers

111 : receiver

121: receiver

: receiver

199) and listen for that extension

to ring,

Description
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency)
enables

tone telephones

Receiver

10. Press the END button to return to the initial

to dial within the system.

To check the DTMF Receivers,

program

activate the DTMF

11. Set the System Program Switch to the

Receivers at a time and confirm if the receiver can

SET position.

receive tone singals.


Operation
Number

at Extension

Connected

Confirmation

to Jack

KX-T123230 or KX-T123235) switch to the TONE


position.

To Remove DTMF Receive 2 and 3:


1. Set the System Program Switch on the
to the PITS position.

2. Set the POWER FAILURE (located on the rear of


KX-Tl23230 or KX-T123235) switch to the ON

2. Dial (30) to enter the DTMF mode.

position.

DTMF-R Selection will be displayed.


3. Press the NEXT button.
DTMF-R NO?+

will be displayed.

3. Dial the extension

number

4. If DTMF Receiver

is bad, do the following

procedure

4. Press the NEXT button, twice, or dial (2).


DTMF-R2 : Enable will be displayed.

199).

the DTMF Receiver

5. Set the POWER FAILURE Switch-to the OFF


position.

: Disable will be displayed.

6. Press the MEMORY

for removing

(100 through

after the next step on this section.

5. Press the SELECT button to change to


Disable.
DTMF-R2

of DTMF Receiver 1:

1. Set the DIALING MODE (located on the rear of

1.

KX-Tl23211

mode.

To check DTMF Receiver


Receiver

button.

good by the procedures

7. Press the NEXT button, or press the SELECT

2, remove DTMF

1 and confirm that DTMF Receiver


of To Remove

2 is

DTMF

Receiver
Receiver

button and then dial (3).


DTMF-R3 : Enable will be displayed.

1 and 3 and Confirmation of DTMF


2.
.
c
To check DTMF Receiver 3, remove DTMF
Receiver

1 and confirm that DTMF Receiver

6. Press the SELECT button to change to


Disable.

good by the procedures

9. Press the MEMORY

Receiver
Receiver

button.
6-4

3 is

of To Remove DTMF

1 and 2 and Confirmation


3.

of DTMF

Table of System Features


The following

system features can be oroarammed


I

Dial Plan Code

System

Zxtension no.
1100 through 199)

Individual

Busy Station

into memorv.,

Features

Dial Plan Code

Inter Office Calling

System Features
Cancelling

Signaling

Message

Waiting

Cancelling Calk Forwarding


Do Not Disturb

or

Executi.ve Override-into
Extension
Call Forwarding-All
Calling

Doorphone

Calls

1 or 2

Paging-External
and 2

Equipment

Paging-External

Equipment

Call Forwarding-Busy
No Answer

Call Forwarding-To
Paging-External

Equipment

or

Outside

Line

Dial Call Pickup

Deny

2
(YOU may enter 8 and trunk
group number 1 through 8
instead of 91

Group no.
(1 through 8)

Paging

Group

Paging

All Extensions

Cancelling

Paging

All Extensions

Dial Call Pickup

Do Not Disturb

Deny

and External

Paging Answer-External
Equipment
1 or 2

Paging Answer-GroupAll Extensions

-[

Data line Security

-[

Cancelling

Data line Security


.
Tone Deny

-[

CO Call Waiting

-I

Cancelling
Deny

CO Call Waiting

Extension
Dew ,

Call Waiting

Cancelling
Extension
Tone Deny

Dial Call Pickup

Call Park Retrieve

Camp-on

6-5

Tone

Tone
.
Call Waiting

Table of System Features


Dial Plan

Code

System

Features

Dial Plan

(cont.)

Code

System

Timed
Cancelling

Minute

(00 through

59)

Absent

Reminder

Message

Message

Will Return Soon

Message

Gone Home

Message

Featu

Cancelling

Timed

Remir

Electronic

Station

Lock

Cancelling

Electronic

Back at IO:00 AM.


Lock

Month

(01 through

12)

Message

Message

q q mm Day
Mode

Out Until 10/23

In a Meeting

Flexible

Night Service-

Flexible

Night Service.

Station

6-6

Program

Clear

St,

LIST OF TONES

Confirmation

tone 1

Confirmation

tone 2

Confirmation

tone 3

Feature

activation

I
I

I
Ii

,_ :
: -,:

tone

Dial tone
Busy tone
Account Code
input tone
Reorder

tone

Ringback

tone

Do not Disturb

tone

Call on hold tone


Alarm tone
Hold time reminder
Call waiting

tone

LIST OF RING TONES


:

1 set
4

:
ti

CO calls
(CO hold recall)

Intercom
(Intercom

calls
hold recall)

Doorphone
calls
Timed reminder
Recall

for camp-on

6-7

SPECIFICATION
General Description
1.

2.
3.
4.

.
5.

Capacity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outsides

Max.12
Stations
Max.32
ControlMethod....................................... Stored Program CPU : 16 bits CPU
Control ROM: 192 KB, Control RAM : 64KB
Switching
. .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. ... . .. ... .. .. .. ..
Space Division CMOS Crosspoint Switch
power
Supplies
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary
AC 12OV 60Hz
- >
Secondary
Station Supply Volt : 26V
Circuit Volt : +5V, +12V, -14V, -16V, *7V
Power Failure *Max.6 outsides assigned to stations . . .. ..power
failure transfer
l System operation for several hours by recommended
battery (car type batteries - consisting of two 12 VDC)
Dialing

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outward

Internal
Mode Conversion
6.
7.
8.

9.

Intercom

paths

. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. ... . ... .. .. ... .. . .. . 5

Outside (CO)-Outside (CO) paths........ 2


Connector .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. . ... Outsides (CO)
Station
Paging Output
External Music Input
EXT Connection

Dial Pulse IOPPS, 20PPS


Tone Dial
Dial Pulse IOPPS, 20PPS
Tone Dial
DP-DTMF, DTMF-DP

. .. .. . .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. Cable

Modular Jack (RJ-11)


Amphenol Connector
Pin Jack (RCA JACK)
two-conductors
Jack (MINIJACK 9/64 inch
diameter)
1 pair wire (Standard Telephone)
2 pair wire (KX-T1232301
KX-T123220/
KX-T123250/ KX-T61630/ KX-T61620/
KX-T61631/

10.

SMDR

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface

Station Message
Detail Recording

Output Equipment
Detail Recording

KX-T61650/

KX-T30825/

KX-T30830/ KX-T30820/ KX-T30850)


3 pair wire (KX-T123235)
RS-232C
Printer, Data Terminal
Data, Time, Ext. Number, CO Number,
Calling Number, Calling Time, Account
Code

Characteristics
1. Station Loop Limit . .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... . KX-T123230/
KX-T61630/

2.
3.

KX-T123250/

KX-T61650/

KX-Tl23235/

KX-T61631/

KX-T3d825

KX-T30830/ KX-T30820/ KX-T30850


40 ohms
Standard Telephone
600 ohms including set
Doorp hone
20 ohms
Minimum Leak Resistance . ... . .. ... .. ... .. .. .15,000 ohms
Maximum Number of Station
Instruments
per
Line
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (KX-T123230,
KX-T123220, KX-T123250, KX-T123235, KX-T61630,
KX-T61631,
KX-T30825

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

KX-T123220/
KX-T61620/

KX-T61620,

KX-T61650,

KX-T30830,

or Standard telephone)
Ring
Voltage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Vrms at 20 Hz depends
on Ringing Load I
primary power .. .. .. .. ... . .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. . 120 Vat, 60 Hz, 1.4 A maximum
Central Office Loop Limit..................... 1600 ohms maximum
Environmental Requirements...............O-40
C, 10%90%
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range.........204-1000
msec
6-8

KX-T30820,

KX-T30850,

TELEPHONE COMPANY and F.C.C.


- :
REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of the F.C.C. Rules and Regulations for connection of terminal system
(this device is classified as terminal system) to the telephone network and for your convenience, the following
information is presented:

1. Notification to the Telephone Company


Customers, before connecting terminal equipment to the telephone network, shall upon request of the Telephone
Company, inform the Telephone Company of the particular line(s) to which such connection iS made, the F.C.C.
registration number and (see label on side of unit.) ringer equivalence number of the registered terminal equipment.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of devices you may connect to your telephone line and still have all 01
those devices ring when your telephone number is called. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the RENs of all
devices connected to one line should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you may connect
to your line, as determined by the REN, you should contact your local telephone company to determine the maximum
REN for your calling area.

2. Direct connection to A Party-line or Coin-operated Telephone Lines is Prohibited

3. Incidence of Harm to The Telephone lines


Should Terminal Equipment cause
notify the customer that temporary
practical, the Telephone Company
the circumstances. In case of such

harm to the Telephone Network, the Telephone Company shall, where practical,
discontinuance of service may be required. However, where prior notice is not
may temporarily discontinue service forthwith, if such action is reasonable in
unnotified temporary discontinuance of service, the Telephone Company shall:

(a) Promptly notify the customer of such temporary discontinuance

of service.

(b) Afford the customer the opportunity to correct the situation which gave rise to the temporary discontinuance.

(c) Inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Commission
in Subpart E of Part 68 of FCC Telephone Equipment Rules.

6-9

pursuant to the procedures set out

4. Compatibility

of The Telephone Network and Terminal Equipment

(a) Availability of telephone interface information.

Technical information concerning interface


including the number of Ringers which may
pertmit Terminal Equipment to operate in a
facilities, shall be provided by the Telephone

(b)

parameters and specifications is not specified in FCC Rules,


be connected to a particular telephone line, which is needed to
manner compatible with Telephone Company;communications
Company upon customers request.

Changes in Telephone Company Communications

Facilities, Equipment, Operations and Procedures.

The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications


facilities, equipment, operations or
procedures, where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent
with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. If such changes can be
reasonably expected to render any customer Terminal Equipment incompatible with Telephone Company
Communications
Facilities, or require modification or alteration of such Terminal Equipment, or otherwise
materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow the
customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

6-10

OTHERS
l

Keep the unit away from heating appliances and electrical noise generating devices
such as fluorescent lamps, motors and television. These noise sources can interfere
with the performance of the EASA-PHONE.

This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture,


should not be exposed to direct sunlight.

high temperature

and vibration,

and
/

Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc . into the vents or other holes of this unit

If there is trouble, disconnect the unit from the telephone line. Plug the telephone
directly into the telephone line. If the telephone operates properly, do not reconnect
the unit to the line until the trouble has been repaired by an authorized Panasonic
Factory Service Center. If the telephone does not operate properly, chances are that
the trouble is in the telephone system, and not in the unit.

Do not use benzine, thinner, or similar solvents. Do not use abrasive powder toclean
the cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.

6-11

Servicenter

WARNING
energy

-This

equipment

and if not installed

may cause interference

generates,

Directory

uses, and can radiate

and used in accordance

to radio communications.

comply with the limits for a Class A computing


15 of FCC Rules, which are designed
interference
equipment

when

operated

in a residential

in a commercial

It has been tested

manual,

and found to

pursuant to Subpart J of-Part

reasonable

protection

environment.

area is likely to cause interference

user at his own expense will be required


required to correct the interference.

WARNING:

with the instructions

device

to provide

radio frequency

to take whatever

against such

Operation

of this

in which case the


measures

may be

TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT


EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
I

6-l 2

Phone Number Directory


b TELEPHONE
) p

NUMBER

TEL NO.

1) C40 1

b EXTENSION

NUMBER

JACK NO.

NUMBER

EXTENSION

4
TELNO.

I co I

JACK NO.

17
18
19

8
9

14
15

31
32

b SPEED DIALING

11 CO 1

TELN0.c

4
NAME

TEL NO.

I
I

EXTENSION

NUMBER

NAhilE

.I

b SPEED DIALING

7-2

PROGRAMMING
TO SET
late and Time
jetting

Speed

Iialing

Entry

i...,,ay

:..,month

:......,,,,ur

i . . .._ minute

I . . . . . . AM / PM

q
:......-Speed
There

is the phone

~FMoRy
IENd
line access
number
H
: access
number

through

access

code

number

(00 through

directory

of Trunk

Group

99)

on page

7-1.

I
IEl

IEEl

&

yd-yiw
:.....dial
:.........,until

the extension
the desired

Iperator
issignment

jack

number

(100 through

number(O1

199)

through32)appears

I
EJ

bEI+

laal TORY
IENQl
-....dial
the jack number
:....-until

aired
-elephone
issignment
ES Console

.- day of the week

: automatic

!xtension
slumber
4ssignment

PROGRAM

Gia~m~m~m~m~m~m~&~
m..year

System

- :

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

;;;;,,
El

TABLE

la

Operator

Operator

the desired

operator

set operator
number

Jack

number

set operator

Jack

number

set operator

:.....

dial the jack

number

-..-dial

the jack

paired

with

Jack

la

32)

GaGaymGaymm

for

Automatic
CO
Hold Using DSS
Button

(01 through

(1 or 2) appears

Default
To make

program

change

Default
To make

program

change

liiialsELECTl[MEMORYm
i..... With
With Transfer
Without
Transfer

number

number

console
paired
01

paired

with

1 (01 through
with

Console

32)

7-3

Transfer
To make

program

change

2 (01 through

32)

I
Transfer
/ Without
Default

console

TO SET
Day/ Night
3ewjce
Mode

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

;;;;g
la

kE?l~NlENol
Manual

Switching
of
Service
Mode

Starting

PROGRAM

/ Automatic

Manual
Automatic

Time
El
:-----until

the desired

day of the week

,NEm&m~~m~m~~m~,A

:--minute

L----starting
;----starting

appears

L--AM

I PM

time for day service

(hour)

time for night service

(hour)

r-----AM

;---minute

I PM

-&~&let>~IYE?.lORYI~
J

Default
all days of the week
9:00 AM
5:00 PM

Day service
night Service

:all

Hunting
lia

&d

k&zl

hdFMoRyl
:..........

:......-

change
Tuesday

Wednesday

GGI

Disable

until the desired

/ Enable
extension

group

number

group

group

number

all 8 extension
group

group

(1 through

Extension
group 4

8)appears

group
group5

group

group-7

group

Disable
Enable
Hunting

program

+
lQa

Setting

To make
Monday

Sunday

Type

I
bl

=&$=-w
. . . . . ..Terminate
.......

/ Circular

until the desired

extension

(1 through

8)appears
_.

all 8 extension
group
Terminate
Circular

group

7-4

group3

Extension
group 4

group
group5

group

group

group

TO SET
011 Restriction

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

;;g;s
Ii3

Ga-mm

.......

Area Type
Selection
We
_ We

CO Operator
Call-Boundary
Class

liil

Type

Al Type

B I Type

class

number

A
B

Ga@lnnEMoRvla
.........dial

the boundary

Class

1 Class

8)

2 Class

3 Class

Class

To make

program

change

5 Class

Class

7 Class

Default
To make
Restriction
)f System
speed Dialing

(1 through

program

change

.......

Restriction

roil

El

Gay-m
/ No restriction

Default
X

Restriction
No restriction

Allowable
Exchange
Code Selection

lzl

Ga&mIUEMbRVIm
i.....exchange
:..........

code

until the desired

with3digits
memory

code

number

02

(01 through
Memory

01
exchange

09

code

entry

10

I
Area Code Entry
for Class 3

11

I
1

12

13

code
04

Memory
code
1 14
1

03

20) appears
1

number
05

06

07

08

number
15

16

code

number

(01 through

02

17

18

19

20

I
m

=&=qLORYl~
-....:..........

area

code

with 3 digits

until the desired

memory

Memory
01
Area

code

09

entry

Memory

10

11

12

13

7-5

63

code
14

code
04

20) appears
number
05

06

1;

07

08

20

number
15

16

17

18

19

TO SET
roll

STEPS REQUIRED

;;;zs

Restriction

TO CHANGE PROGRAM

:cont.)
kl

ki+t~k.o~~~6iii

Exchange
Code
Entry for Class 5

-.*..:..........

exchange

code

until the desired

with

3 digits

memory

code

number

02

(01 through

Memory
01
exchange

code

entry

10

11

12

Exchange
Code
Entry for Class 7

13

I
Memory

09

03

14

i.Ed

&pflFMORYl

lmul
code with

. . . . ..exchange
:..........

until the desired

06

07

15

16

17

08

18

19

20

Bdigits
number

(01 through

20) appears

Memory
Exchange

code

entry

02

1
I

10

11

t
I

12

t
I

13

code
14

code

1
I

04

16

Default
To make

the time

(1 minute

through

05

06

07

change

30

set!

15

17

18

19

9 minutes)

IiiEil-wm

Default
To make

1 min / 1.5 min I 2 min I Disable


minute
301 seconds

program

change

........30

secl2

Recall
lizEl~-m
min
To make

Default
30 set
2 min

7-6

08

number

1 minute

1
I

program

30 seconds.

Et

number

liaymm
..........dial

Eil

03

I
Memory

09

ransfer
Fime

number

memory

01

iold Recall
rime Set

number
05

I
Ea

iold Time
qeminder

code

code
04

20) appears

program

change

2 minutes

disable

20

TO SET
Zall Forwarding
Starting Time

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

I;;;=

lzil

liiamlNlEMORYla
:..........l

ring delay/

2 rings

delay/

Default
1
2
3
4

ickup Dial
Ielay Time

(211

ring delay
rings delay
rings delay
rings delay

3 rings
To make

change

set

I 2 set

1 3 set

I 4 set
To make

Eil

program

delay

lNEXrlTrnI

1
2
3
4

Time

4 rings

...,.,.....l

:o-to-co
Duration
.imit

delay/

program

change

set
set
set
set

EiEEllalUEMoRVm
I...........-

dial the time

w
minute

(1 minute

through

To make

Default
10

32 minutes)
program

change
1

;MDR
(Carriage
RS232C
Communication
Parameters

return

for a new

line)

lNEXTllzyliiiiGJ
. . . . ..CR

+LF/

CR
To make

program

change

CR+LF
CR
(Baud

rate)

INEXTllSELECTllhnEMORY
.....llOB/

Default
To make

(Word

program

15081

30081

600B/

120081

240081

4800Bl

96008

change

length)

INEX;T1lSELECTlm
i.....

7 bits!

8 bits
To make

7 bits
8 bits

program

change

7-7

TO SET
SMDR

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

,,,;&f

(cont.)

(Parity)
ml~Lizz%ma
...None

/ Mark

/ Space

I Even/
None

Odd
Space

Mark

Even

Odd

Default
To make

program

change
-

(Stop

bit length)

tiiaqzllaaEaapar]m
.l

bit / 2 bits

1 bit
2 bits
SMDR
Parameters

(Page
la

length)

EEmpal
*.e.........

(Skip

4 through

99 lines

0 through

95 lines

perforation)

/iiEl(ABI(MEMORY1~~
..........

Incoming/
Outgoing
Selection
printing

Call
for

IEl

m~GiiiEmm~~m
.Outgoing

: On/Off

..,....-.,lncoming

: On/Off

Outgoing
ON
Default
To make

Secret
Speed
Dial / One
Touch Dial
Printing

ia

Incoming
OFF

ON

program

OFF

change

Ga~LiiGElta
....*..No

Printing

/ Printing

Default
No Printing
Printing

To make

program

change

7-S

TO SET
SMDER
System
Dump

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

;;zzz

PROGRAM
-

(cont.)
Data

l All Parameters

0 System
l Speed

0 stop

Parameter
Dial
output

t
12

m-

~ORYI~
:.....A11

Para

/ System

Para

I CO

Para

/ EXT

Para

/ DSS

Para

/ Speed

0 CO Parameter
+
iid-

kiiiidh.BhIF~ORY~

kCd
*.......dial

:.........until

Extension

the CO number

1
,.....dial

:.........until

the EXT Para

number

..........until

32)

I
dial DSS number

the DSS Para

(1 or 2)

appears

lEaqzImm
...........

Instantly/

5s after

dial / 10s after

dial I 15s after

To make
Instantly
5s after dial
1 OS after dial
15s after dial

%ernal
kcess

(01 through

Parameter

......

El

jack
appears

Duration
Time
Count Start Mode

12)

Parameter
+

l DSS

(01 through

the CO Para appears

program

dial

change

Paging
Tone

..........until

the desired

external

7-9

paging

equipment

number

(1 or 2) appears

Dia! / Stop
- .

Output

TO SET
Direct Inward
System
Access
(DISA)

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

PROGRAM
ADDRESS

(Control

code

*)

El
INEXTI~~
....-

Enable

/ Disable
Default
X

I
Enable
Disable

To make

program

change
/

-z
(Prolong

time)

+EFTlISELECTITI#EMORYI
--..-

2 min / 3 min I4

min I 5 min

2 minutes
Default
To make
(Answer

delay

program

3 minutes

4 minutes

5 minutes
X

change

time)

[NEXTIJSELECT(TllvlEMORYl
....-

0 set

I5

set I 10 set

I15

0 second
Default
To make
(Tone

program

set
5 seconds

10 seconds
X

15 seconds

change

detect)

[-ISELECTIpm
-..-

Enable

/ Disable
Default
X

Enable
Disable
(Security

To make

program

change

type)

pEjElmFm[
....-

None Security
I All Security

I Trunk
None

Default
To make
(Remote

security

program

Security
Security

Trunk

Security
X

All Security

change

code)

mlzEmEymNo.
....-

4 digits

(0000

through

Default
70000
(User

security

NEXT
00~~00

To make

program

change

code)

SELECT

SELECT

I.....
User
User
User
User

9999)

code
code
code
code

1
2
3
4

CODE

User

No

MEMORY

....-

4 digits

Code

1 / User

Default
60000
60000

END

(0000
Code

through
2 / User
To make

60000
60000
7-

10

9999)
Code
program

3 / User
change

Code

TO SET

PROGRAM
ADDRESS

STEPS REQUIRED

TO CHANGE PROGRAM
-

Off Premise
Extension

Is

lNEXTllzyEE3lnnEMORYIlENDl
:....-

Disable

I Enable
Default

Enable
Disable

Off Hook Call


Announcement
(OHCA)

$31

change
/
_

jiimyIUEMORYIIEND(
Disable

/ Enable
Default
X

Enable
Disable

13

program

....-

System
Working
Report

To make

To make

program

change

program

change

lNEXTll5EplIUEMORYIlENDl
:....-

Dump
Dump
SWR

Dump

Stat-l
Stop
Data Clear

Start

/ Dump

Stop
Default
X

7-

11

/ SWR

Data

Clear
To make

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

'ROGRAM
rDOREss

TO SET
ZO Connection
tssignment

t
IGil

@ExIly

VI

-............-

:........until

PROGRAM

I
lMmoRy lEa
Connect

the desired

/ Not Connect

CO number

(01 through

12)appears

Dial Mode
DTMF / Pulse
Call Blocking
Selection

IEI

:..........
:...*.*....until
1

DTMF

Mode

CO number

Default

all COs
Tone

Pulse Speed
Selection

la

(DTMF)

Mode

Pulse Mode
Call Blocking

Mode

IGI

01
!
I

/ Call Blocking

(01 through

12)

Mode

appears

Tomake

X
!
1

Mode

1 02

1 03

1 04

) 05

orooram
cr- large
CO number
1 06 1 07 1 08 1 09

!
I

!
I

I
I

1 10

II

II

I
I

I
I

1 11

1 12

!
I

=@v-w
......-...

Host PBX Access


Codes
Assignment

/ Pulse

the desired

...........Low
Speed
/ High Speed
until the desired
CO number
(01 through

12) appears

I
=+v hEcdORyIkMQl
......

..........

.......

up to 8 outside

until the desired

CO number

7-12

access

codes

(01 through

each

with

12) appears

a maximum

of 2 digits

TO SET
drunk Group
4ssignment

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

;E;E

PROGRAM
.

+
El

iia

$lr!mfORYI
-.........dial
-......

Trunk
Trunk

group
group

IENd
the trunk

until the desired

7
8

group

CO number

number
(01 through

(1 through

8)

12) appears

7-13

TO SET

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

E;zEz
other

Flexible
3utward
Dialing
9ssignment

PROGRAM

CO number

El

Day Mode
......

L......Enable I Disable
i......
until the desired
ack number
(01 through
32) appears
until the desired
CO num b er (01 through
12)appears

7-14

TO SET
Flexible
Outward
Dialing
Assignment
[cont.)
Night

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

ROGRAM
\ODRESS

other

PROGRAM

CO number

la

:.....

Mode

: .......
Enable / Disable
: ...... until the desired
ack number
(01 through
32) appears
until the d&i&d
CO nul mb er ~~
(01 throuoh
_ _a-- 121
.-I annears
-r-r---.-

To make
17118119120121
co1
Co

program

change

Jack number
~22~23~24~25~26~27~28(29130131

132

Enable
Disable

Enable
Disable

I 1 I
I I I
I I I

I
I
I

I I

TO SET
qlexible

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

,;;;Ez

PRO.GRAM

Ringing

bsignment
Day Mode
*.....

:.......,Enable/
Disable
L:..... until,the
desired
ack number
(01 through
32) appears
until the desired
CO num b er (01 through
12)appears

7-16

TO SET
Flexible
Ringing
Assignment
[cent .)
Night

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

'ROGFtAM
rDDRESS

other

PROGRAM

CO number

14

Mode

L......
until the desired
ack number
(01 through
32)appears
until the desired
CO num b er (01 throuoh - 121, appears

:.....
I

Default
all jack

Co

Enable
Disable

Co

1o

Co

11

Enable
Disable
Enable

Co12

Enable
Disable

17

18

To makt ? program

Jack

change

number

To make program
change
Jack number
20 121 ~22~23~24~25~26~27~28~29~30~31

19

7-17

1
132

l
I

TO SET

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

I;;;&$

other

3elayed
Ringing
4ssignment
Day Mode

CO number

LEI
......

L...-..ImmdtlyI
lring / Pring I3ring
I......until
the desired
ack number
(01 through32)appears
until the desired
CO num b er (01 through
12)appears

7-18

TO SET

3OGRAM
IDRESS

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

belayed
Ringing
assignment

To make

Day Mode
(cont.)

7-19

program

change

PROGRAM

TO SET

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

ROGRAM
DDRESS

Ielayed
Ringing
Lssignment
Night
(cont.)

To make

Mode

17118119120121
I Imm,-ltl\r

IIIIIIIIII

program

change

Jack number
122123124125126127128129130131
I

7-21

132
I

:O Mode (Normal
IL I DISA)
issignment
Day Mode

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

ROGFIAM
DDRESS

TO SET
I

Selecting

the Normal

or DISA

mode

m
: . . . . . . . . . . . . .

:........until
l Selecting

Normal

the desired

ISEy
..........I

When

DlS/,

CO number

(01 through

12) appears

,
- -.

the DIL mode


t

IiEJ

DIL

I
q

htmORY1
lEtd
*...DIL
.*..a......
Dial jack number
(01 through
32)
until the desired
CO number
(01 through
12) appears

mode
CO number
01

Jack

Night

Mode

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

09

10

11

12

number

l Selecting

the

Normal

or DISA

mode

El
:.

:........unti
l Selecting

the

...........

Normal

I the desired

CO number

.........

When

DIL

(01 through

12) appears

DIL mode

liEii~L&izlm&m
i....D,Li
..........Dial
1

,-,,SA

until the desired


Default

jack

number

CO number

(01 through

(01 through
To make

32)

12) appears
program

change

mode
CO number
01

Jack

02

03

04

number

7-22

05

06

07

08

-Tb SET
ause Time
ssignment

PROGRAM
mbREss

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

>alling
Zontrol
signal

I
lifzl

=+y-w
..........1.5sec
until the desired

I..........

iookswitch
iming

PROGRAM

I 2.5sec
I 3.5sec I 4.5sec
CO number
(01 through

12) appears

Flash
led

Party
(CPC)

-~ORyIIF~
--300ms

!-until

the desired

_----

I 600ms

CO number

AB = flm

qm

/ 9OOms

(01 through

/ 1200ms

12) appears

: Disable
: under

5 m seconds

pJJ:
pJm:
a

q
q B:
q@

is not available
: J
: 62 m seconds
70
: 350 ---- default

B : 614
See the CPC

Signal

Detect

Time

To make

Default
all COs

(all 12 Cos)

01

02

03

350 m set

7-23

04

05

table

page

3-63.

program
change
CO number
06
07
08

09

10

11

12

TO SET
Disconnect

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

;;;:gz

Time
la

Ed

wm

---1.5secl
v......

Automatic
Designated
CO Line
Access

PROGRAM

4.0sec

until the desired

CO umber

(01 through

12) appears

I
Is

lia

FkORYIM
-.....a......

Enable/Disable

until the desired

CO number

7-24

(01

through

12) appears

TO SET
Service
Class
Assignment
of
Toll Restriction
[cont.)
Night

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE

E;iEy
El

Ed

hfXIi

[MEMhiiiid
:....-dial

:.......until

the service
the desired

class

jack

number

number

(1 through

(01 through

8)

32)appears

Mode

tiension
Jame
El

GGi3-m
#......until
:..*.....
:.......
l There

account Code
iput Mode

dial

until the desired

is the phone

the desired

(0 through

number

jack
directory

I
IEl

=&w-m
*-Option

I Forced

7-26

9, *
number

letter

appears

, or # )
(01 through

on page

7-l.

32) appears

PROGRAM

TO SET
Zall Transfer
ToOutside
Line

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

LT;$

I
m

m
+-Mm
-- Enable
i-...-.until

Tall Forwarding
To Outside
Line

I Disable

the desired

jack

+mAi
:- Enable
:......-until

/ Disable

the de

%ecutive
3verride
i - Enable

/ Disable

7-27

number

(01 through32)appears

:.....

:.....-until
the
until the desired

ber (01 through


32) appears
er (1 or 2) appears

See More
Panasonic Manuals

www.voicesonic.com
Phone: 877-289-2829

3DQDVRQLF7HOHSKRQH6\VWHPV

7-28

TO SET
Unging
assignment
d
Ioorphone
cont.)
Night

STEPS REQUIRED TO CHANGE PROGRAM

;;;;g
another

doorphone
other jack
VI

I
171)

~yxyl~

>all on Hold
standard
relephone

riwoRY~
*......Enable / Disable
:......
until the desired
jack number
until the desired
doorphone
number

-....

Mode

number
number

(01 through
32) appears
(1 or 2) appears

for
Q

lazigm(SP101
i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,,,-J,,~,,,,o,&~
Default
Hold-l

To make

program

change

Hold-2
system
Zlear

Data
lia

l All Parameters

0 System
l Speed

Parameter
Dial
t

mIsFFcd-w

l CO

1
-...........-

All Para

/ System

Parameter

Para

/ CO Para

I EXT

Para

/ DSS,Pala

/ Speed

=--y-M
m.....dial
:........-

until the CO Para

CO number

(01 through

12)

appears

. Extension

Parameter
I

liiisia
:-.........until

l DSS

lblFMORY
:....-dial
jack

~
number(01

through32)

the EXT Para appears

Parameter
1

~~~~-~
-....-dial
L........-

until the

DSS Para

DSS number
appears

(1 or 2)

--

Dial

INDEX

9* ,

. Programming
A.

Account

Page
Code Input Mode

Allowable

Exchange

...............

AreaTypeS&c~ion

.......

.............

....................

Automatic

CO Hold Using DSS Button

Automatic

Designated
Staping

Call Forwarding

ToOutside

Time

............

Line

Call on Hold for Standard


Call Transfer

To Outside

Party Control

CO Connection

3-22

HookSwitch

3-18

Host PBX Access Codes Assignment

3-11

3-73

line

.......

.............

(CPC) Signal

e . . * . 1 . . * 3-62

3-57

CO Operator

3-19

CO-to-CO

Duration

........

Time Limit

0.

Off Hook Call Anouncement

I Outgoing

Off Premise

Date and Time

..........

Day / Night Service

(Switching

Day / Night Service

(Starting

Delayed

Ringing

Mode)

* . * 1* .

Time)

Assignment

P.

3-30

R.

3-12

S.

* . * . * . * v 3-13

.............

Dial Mode (DTMF/Pulse/CalI

Outward

Dialing

Blocking)

Disconnect

System Access

Time

Selection

Doorphone

Duration

(DISA)

3-64

.................

(Paired

Telephone

3-45

...................

3-9

.............

3-53

Assignment

For DSS Console

3-l 0

Pickup Dial Delay Time

...

3-29

Pulse Speed

.................

Ringing

Selection

+ .............

3-50

3-54

....................

Assignment

Communication

Parameters

. . e. .

Secret Speed Dial / One Touch Dial Printing


SMDR Parameters
.....................
Time {Day / Night Service)

System

Data

System

Speed

Switching

....

........

3-32

Dump

..

....................

Dialing

3-31
3-78
3-37

Entry

Report

3-36
3-35
3-13

Message Detail Recording (SMDR)


Data Clear
.....................

System Working

3-75

Assignment)

3-10

..........

3-40

Time Count Start Mode


Code Selection

Exchange

Code Entry For Class 5

Exchange
Executive

Code Entry For Class 7


Override
.....................

Extension

Name

.......................

Extension

Number

Assignment

Extension

Group Assignment
Paging

.............

.............

3-5

.................

of Day / Night Service

Mode

3-47
.....

3-12

J-76

Exchange

External

3-46

3-60

T.

Toll Restriction

Access Tone

...............

TransferRecallTime

.........

3-23

Trunk Group Assignment

.........

3-24
3-74

...........

3-8

.............

3-66

.............

3-41

7-30

Class Assignment

of System

3-21

J-69

3-l 7

........................

Toll Restriction-Service
Toll Restriction

E.

.......

.................

Station

3-49

* * * 3-42, 3-57

...........................

DSS Console

(OPX),

3-36

Pause Time Assignment

3-57

......................

Do Not Disturb Override

3-51

For Printing

(OHCA)

Assignment

Paired Telephone

Starting

3-56

.........................

Direct Inward

Extension

Assignment

System

Direct In Line

......

3-61

3-4

..................

Setting

Call Select&%

Operator

RS-232C

D.

h. aep. . a. e. 1. * . .

3-21j

3-16

Incoming

3-48

CO Mode (Normal / Direct In Line / Direct Inward


System Access) Assignment
.............
Class

.*., .....

.........................

I.

3-77

3-26

3-72

..............

Call-Boundary

...................
.............

Flash Timing

HuntingType

3-15

Telephone

Assignment

3-21

3-28

..........

Ii.

Hold Recall Time Set


HoId Time Reminder

a . . * 1 3-65

..........................

Hunting

Calling

......

CO Line Access

Call Fonvarding
CalI

3-71

Code Selection

Area Code Entry For Class 3

c.

- =

....

Speed
..a.-=

Dial&g
..........

................

....

3-67

....

3-20
3-27
3-52